RFC2328

From RFC-Wiki

Network Working Group J. Moy Request for Comments: 2328 Ascend Communications, Inc. STD: 54 April 1998 Obsoletes: 2178 Category: Standards Track

                         OSPF Version 2

Status of this Memo

This document specifies an Internet standards track protocol for the
Internet community, and requests discussion and suggestions for
improvements.  Please refer to the current edition of the "Internet
Official Protocol Standards" (STD 1) for the standardization state
and status of this protocol.  Distribution of this memo is
unlimited.

Copyright Notice

Copyright (C) The Internet Society (1998).  All Rights Reserved.

Abstract

This memo documents version 2 of the OSPF protocol.  OSPF is a
link-state routing protocol.  It is designed to be run internal to a
single Autonomous System.  Each OSPF router maintains an identical
database describing the Autonomous System's topology.  From this
database, a routing table is calculated by constructing a shortest-
path tree.
OSPF recalculates routes quickly in the face of topological changes,
utilizing a minimum of routing protocol traffic.  OSPF provides
support for equal-cost multipath.  An area routing capability is
provided, enabling an additional level of routing protection and a
reduction in routing protocol traffic.  In addition, all OSPF
routing protocol exchanges are authenticated.
The differences between this memo and RFC 2178 are explained in
Appendix G. All differences are backward-compatible in nature.
Implementations of this memo and of RFCs 2178, 1583, and 1247 will
interoperate.
Please send comments to [email protected].
2        The link-state database: organization and calculations  13
16.7     Events generated as a result of routing table changes  177

Introduction

This document is a specification of the Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF) TCP/IP internet routing protocol.  OSPF is classified as an
Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP).  This means that it distributes
routing information between routers belonging to a single Autonomous
System.  The OSPF protocol is based on link-state or SPF technology.
This is a departure from the Bellman-Ford base used by traditional
TCP/IP internet routing protocols.
The OSPF protocol was developed by the OSPF working group of the
Internet Engineering Task Force.  It has been designed expressly for
the TCP/IP internet environment, including explicit support for CIDR
and the tagging of externally-derived routing information.  OSPF
also provides for the authentication of routing updates, and
utilizes IP multicast when sending/receiving the updates.  In
addition, much work has been done to produce a protocol that
responds quickly to topology changes, yet involves small amounts of
routing protocol traffic.
1.1.  Protocol overview
    OSPF routes IP packets based solely on the destination IP
    address found in the IP packet header.  IP packets are routed
    "as is" -- they are not encapsulated in any further protocol
    headers as they transit the Autonomous System.  OSPF is a
    dynamic routing protocol.  It quickly detects topological
    changes in the AS (such as router interface failures) and
    calculates new loop-free routes after a period of convergence.
    This period of convergence is short and involves a minimum of
    routing traffic.
    In a link-state routing protocol, each router maintains a
    database describing the Autonomous System's topology.  This
    database is referred to as the link-state database. Each
    participating router has an identical database.  Each individual
    piece of this database is a particular router's local state
    (e.g., the router's usable interfaces and reachable neighbors).
    The router distributes its local state throughout the Autonomous
    System by flooding.
    All routers run the exact same algorithm, in parallel.  From the
    link-state database, each router constructs a tree of shortest
    paths with itself as root.  This shortest-path tree gives the
    route to each destination in the Autonomous System.  Externally
    derived routing information appears on the tree as leaves.
    When several equal-cost routes to a destination exist, traffic
    is distributed equally among them.  The cost of a route is
    described by a single dimensionless metric.
    OSPF allows sets of networks to be grouped together.  Such a
    grouping is called an area.  The topology of an area is hidden
    from the rest of the Autonomous System.  This information hiding
    enables a significant reduction in routing traffic.  Also,
    routing within the area is determined only by the area's own
    topology, lending the area protection from bad routing data.  An
    area is a generalization of an IP subnetted network.
    OSPF enables the flexible configuration of IP subnets.  Each
    route distributed by OSPF has a destination and mask.  Two
    different subnets of the same IP network number may have
    different sizes (i.e., different masks).  This is commonly
    referred to as variable length subnetting.  A packet is routed
    to the best (i.e., longest or most specific) match.  Host routes
    are considered to be subnets whose masks are "all ones"
    (0xffffffff).
    All OSPF protocol exchanges are authenticated.  This means that
    only trusted routers can participate in the Autonomous System's
    routing.  A variety of authentication schemes can be used; in
    fact, separate authentication schemes can be configured for each
    IP subnet.
    Externally derived routing data (e.g., routes learned from an
    Exterior Gateway Protocol such as BGP; see [Ref23]) is
    advertised throughout the Autonomous System.  This externally
    derived data is kept separate from the OSPF protocol's link
    state data.  Each external route can also be tagged by the
    advertising router, enabling the passing of additional
    information between routers on the boundary of the Autonomous
    System.
1.2.  Definitions of commonly used terms
    This section provides definitions for terms that have a specific
    meaning to the OSPF protocol and that are used throughout the
    text.  The reader unfamiliar with the Internet Protocol Suite is
    referred to [Ref13] for an introduction to IP.
    Router
        A level three Internet Protocol packet switch.  Formerly
        called a gateway in much of the IP literature.
    Autonomous System
        A group of routers exchanging routing information via a
        common routing protocol.  Abbreviated as AS.
    Interior Gateway Protocol
        The routing protocol spoken by the routers belonging to an
        Autonomous system.  Abbreviated as IGP.  Each Autonomous
        System has a single IGP.  Separate Autonomous Systems may be
        running different IGPs.
    Router ID
        A 32-bit number assigned to each router running the OSPF
        protocol.  This number uniquely identifies the router within
        an Autonomous System.
    Network
        In this memo, an IP network/subnet/supernet.  It is possible
        for one physical network to be assigned multiple IP
        network/subnet numbers.  We consider these to be separate
        networks.  Point-to-point physical networks are an exception
        - they are considered a single network no matter how many
        (if any at all) IP network/subnet numbers are assigned to
        them.
    Network mask
        A 32-bit number indicating the range of IP addresses
        residing on a single IP network/subnet/supernet.  This
        specification displays network masks as hexadecimal numbers.
        For example, the network mask for a class C IP network is
        displayed as 0xffffff00.  Such a mask is often displayed
        elsewhere in the literature as 255.255.255.0.
    Point-to-point networks
        A network that joins a single pair of routers.  A 56Kb
        serial line is an example of a point-to-point network.
    Broadcast networks
        Networks supporting many (more than two) attached routers,
        together with the capability to address a single physical
        message to all of the attached routers (broadcast).
        Neighboring routers are discovered dynamically on these nets
        using OSPF's Hello Protocol.  The Hello Protocol itself
        takes advantage of the broadcast capability.  The OSPF
        protocol makes further use of multicast capabilities, if
        they exist.  Each pair of routers on a broadcast network is
        assumed to be able to communicate directly. An ethernet is
        an example of a broadcast network.
    Non-broadcast networks
        Networks supporting many (more than two) routers, but having
        no broadcast capability.  Neighboring routers are maintained
        on these nets using OSPF's Hello Protocol.  However, due to
        the lack of broadcast capability, some configuration
        information may be necessary to aid in the discovery of
        neighbors.  On non-broadcast networks, OSPF protocol packets
        that are normally multicast need to be sent to each
        neighboring router, in turn. An X.25 Public Data Network
        (PDN) is an example of a non-broadcast network.
        OSPF runs in one of two modes over non-broadcast networks.
        The first mode, called non-broadcast multi-access or NBMA,
        simulates the operation of OSPF on a broadcast network. The
        second mode, called Point-to-MultiPoint, treats the non-
        broadcast network as a collection of point-to-point links.
        Non-broadcast networks are referred to as NBMA networks or
        Point-to-MultiPoint networks, depending on OSPF's mode of
        operation over the network.
    Interface
        The connection between a router and one of its attached
        networks.  An interface has state information associated
        with it, which is obtained from the underlying lower level
        protocols and the routing protocol itself.  An interface to
        a network has associated with it a single IP address and
        mask (unless the network is an unnumbered point-to-point
        network).  An interface is sometimes also referred to as a
        link.
    Neighboring routers
        Two routers that have interfaces to a common network.
        Neighbor relationships are maintained by, and usually
        dynamically discovered by, OSPF's Hello Protocol.
    Adjacency
        A relationship formed between selected neighboring routers
        for the purpose of exchanging routing information.  Not
        every pair of neighboring routers become adjacent.
    Link state advertisement
        Unit of data describing the local state of a router or
        network. For a router, this includes the state of the
        router's interfaces and adjacencies.  Each link state
        advertisement is flooded throughout the routing domain. The
        collected link state advertisements of all routers and
        networks forms the protocol's link state database.
        Throughout this memo, link state advertisement is
        abbreviated as LSA.
    Hello Protocol
        The part of the OSPF protocol used to establish and maintain
        neighbor relationships.  On broadcast networks the Hello
        Protocol can also dynamically discover neighboring routers.
    Flooding
        The part of the OSPF protocol that distributes and
        synchronizes the link-state database between OSPF routers.
    Designated Router
        Each broadcast and NBMA network that has at least two
        attached routers has a Designated Router.  The Designated
        Router generates an LSA for the network and has other
        special responsibilities in the running of the protocol.
        The Designated Router is elected by the Hello Protocol.
        The Designated Router concept enables a reduction in the
        number of adjacencies required on a broadcast or NBMA
        network.  This in turn reduces the amount of routing
        protocol traffic and the size of the link-state database.
    Lower-level protocols
        The underlying network access protocols that provide
        services to the Internet Protocol and in turn the OSPF
        protocol.  Examples of these are the X.25 packet and frame
        levels for X.25 PDNs, and the ethernet data link layer for
        ethernets.
1.3.  Brief history of link-state routing technology
    OSPF is a link state routing protocol.  Such protocols are also
    referred to in the literature as SPF-based or distributed-
    database protocols.  This section gives a brief description of
    the developments in link-state technology that have influenced
    the OSPF protocol.
    The first link-state routing protocol was developed for use in
    the ARPANET packet switching network.  This protocol is
    described in [Ref3].  It has formed the starting point for all
    other link-state protocols.  The homogeneous ARPANET
    environment, i.e., single-vendor packet switches connected by
    synchronous serial lines, simplified the design and
    implementation of the original protocol.
    Modifications to this protocol were proposed in [Ref4].  These
    modifications dealt with increasing the fault tolerance of the
    routing protocol through, among other things, adding a checksum
    to the LSAs (thereby detecting database corruption).  The paper
    also included means for reducing the routing traffic overhead in
    a link-state protocol.  This was accomplished by introducing
    mechanisms which enabled the interval between LSA originations
    to be increased by an order of magnitude.
    A link-state algorithm has also been proposed for use as an ISO
    IS-IS routing protocol.  This protocol is described in [Ref2].
    The protocol includes methods for data and routing traffic
    reduction when operating over broadcast networks.  This is
    accomplished by election of a Designated Router for each
    broadcast network, which then originates an LSA for the network.
    The OSPF Working Group of the IETF has extended this work in
    developing the OSPF protocol.  The Designated Router concept has
    been greatly enhanced to further reduce the amount of routing
    traffic required.  Multicast capabilities are utilized for
    additional routing bandwidth reduction.  An area routing scheme
    has been developed enabling information
    hiding/protection/reduction.  Finally, the algorithms have been
    tailored for efficient operation in TCP/IP internets.
1.4.  Organization of this document
    The first three sections of this specification give a general
    overview of the protocol's capabilities and functions.  Sections
    4-16 explain the protocol's mechanisms in detail.  Packet
    formats, protocol constants and configuration items are
    specified in the appendices.
    Labels such as HelloInterval encountered in the text refer to
    protocol constants.  They may or may not be configurable.
    Architectural constants are summarized in Appendix B.
    Configurable constants are summarized in Appendix C.
    The detailed specification of the protocol is presented in terms
    of data structures.  This is done in order to make the
    explanation more precise.  Implementations of the protocol are
    required to support the functionality described, but need not
    use the precise data structures that appear in this memo.
1.5.  Acknowledgments
    The author would like to thank Ran Atkinson, Fred Baker, Jeffrey
    Burgan, Rob Coltun, Dino Farinacci, Vince Fuller, Phanindra
    Jujjavarapu, Milo Medin, Tom Pusateri, Kannan Varadhan, Zhaohui
    Zhang and the rest of the OSPF Working Group for the ideas and
    support they have given to this project.
    The OSPF Point-to-MultiPoint interface is based on work done by
    Fred Baker.
    The OSPF Cryptographic Authentication option was developed by
    Fred Baker and Ran Atkinson.

The Link-state Database: organization and calculations

The following subsections describe the organization of OSPF's link-
state database, and the routing calculations that are performed on
the database in order to produce a router's routing table.
2.1.  Representation of routers and networks
    The Autonomous System's link-state database describes a directed
    graph.  The vertices of the graph consist of routers and
    networks.  A graph edge connects two routers when they are
    attached via a physical point-to-point network.  An edge
    connecting a router to a network indicates that the router has
    an interface on the network. Networks can be either transit or
    stub networks. Transit networks are those capable of carrying
    data traffic that is neither locally originated nor locally
    destined. A transit network is represented by a graph vertex
    having both incoming and outgoing edges. A stub network's vertex
    has only incoming edges.
    The neighborhood of each network node in the graph depends on
    the network's type (point-to-point, broadcast, NBMA or Point-
    to-MultiPoint) and the number of routers having an interface to
    the network.  Three cases are depicted in Figure 1a.  Rectangles
    indicate routers.  Circles and oblongs indicate networks.
    Router names are prefixed with the letters RT and network names
    with the letter N.  Router interface names are prefixed by the
    letter I.  Lines between routers indicate point-to-point
    networks.  The left side of the figure shows networks with their
    connected routers, with the resulting graphs shown on the right.
                                              **FROM**
                                       *      |RT1|RT2|
            +---+Ia    +---+           *   ------------
            |RT1|------|RT2|           T   RT1|   | X |
            +---+    Ib+---+           O   RT2| X |   |
                                       *    Ia|   | X |
                                       *    Ib| X |   |
                 Physical point-to-point networks
                                              **FROM**
                  +---+                *
                  |RT7|                *      |RT7| N3|
                  +---+                T   ------------
                    |                  O   RT7|   |   |
        +----------------------+       *    N3| X |   |
                   N3                  *
                          Stub networks
                                              **FROM**
            +---+      +---+
            |RT3|      |RT4|              |RT3|RT4|RT5|RT6|N2 |
            +---+      +---+        *  ------------------------
              |    N2    |          *  RT3|   |   |   |   | X |
        +----------------------+    T  RT4|   |   |   |   | X |
              |          |          O  RT5|   |   |   |   | X |
            +---+      +---+        *  RT6|   |   |   |   | X |
            |RT5|      |RT6|        *   N2| X | X | X | X |   |
            +---+      +---+
                      Broadcast or NBMA networks
                Figure 1a: Network map components
         Networks and routers are represented by vertices.
         An edge connects Vertex A to Vertex B iff the
         intersection of Column A and Row B is marked with
                              an X.
    The top of Figure 1a shows two routers connected by a point-to-
    point link. In the resulting link-state database graph, the two
    router vertices are directly connected by a pair of edges, one
    in each direction. Interfaces to point-to-point networks need
    not be assigned IP addresses.  When interface addresses are
    assigned, they are modelled as stub links, with each router
    advertising a stub connection to the other router's interface
    address. Optionally, an IP subnet can be assigned to the point-
    to-point network. In this case, both routers advertise a stub
    link to the IP subnet, instead of advertising each others' IP
    interface addresses.
    The middle of Figure 1a shows a network with only one attached
    router (i.e., a stub network). In this case, the network appears
    on the end of a stub connection in the link-state database's
    graph.
    When multiple routers are attached to a broadcast network, the
    link-state database graph shows all routers bidirectionally
    connected to the network vertex. This is pictured at the bottom
    of Figure 1a.
    Each network (stub or transit) in the graph has an IP address
    and associated network mask.  The mask indicates the number of
    nodes on the network.  Hosts attached directly to routers
    (referred to as host routes) appear on the graph as stub
    networks.  The network mask for a host route is always
    0xffffffff, which indicates the presence of a single node.
    2.1.1.  Representation of non-broadcast networks
        As mentioned previously, OSPF can run over non-broadcast
        networks in one of two modes: NBMA or Point-to-MultiPoint.
        The choice of mode determines the way that the Hello
        protocol and flooding work over the non-broadcast network,
        and the way that the network is represented in the link-
        state database.
        In NBMA mode, OSPF emulates operation over a broadcast
        network: a Designated Router is elected for the NBMA
        network, and the Designated Router originates an LSA for the
        network. The graph representation for broadcast networks and
        NBMA networks is identical. This representation is pictured
        in the middle of Figure 1a.
        NBMA mode is the most efficient way to run OSPF over non-
        broadcast networks, both in terms of link-state database
        size and in terms of the amount of routing protocol traffic.
        However, it has one significant restriction: it requires all
        routers attached to the NBMA network to be able to
        communicate directly. This restriction may be met on some
        non-broadcast networks, such as an ATM subnet utilizing
        SVCs. But it is often not met on other non-broadcast
        networks, such as PVC-only Frame Relay networks. On non-
        broadcast networks where not all routers can communicate
        directly you can break the non-broadcast network into
        logical subnets, with the routers on each subnet being able
        to communicate directly, and then run each separate subnet
        as an NBMA network (see [Ref15]). This however requires
        quite a bit of administrative overhead, and is prone to
        misconfiguration. It is probably better to run such a non-
        broadcast network in Point-to-Multipoint mode.
        In Point-to-MultiPoint mode, OSPF treats all router-to-
        router connections over the non-broadcast network as if they
        were point-to-point links. No Designated Router is elected
        for the network, nor is there an LSA generated for the
        network. In fact, a vertex for the Point-to-MultiPoint
        network does not appear in the graph of the link-state
        database.
        Figure 1b illustrates the link-state database representation
        of a Point-to-MultiPoint network. On the left side of the
        figure, a Point-to-MultiPoint network is pictured. It is
        assumed that all routers can communicate directly, except
        for routers RT4 and RT5. I3 though I6 indicate the routers'
        IP interface addresses on the Point-to-MultiPoint network.
        In the graphical representation of the link-state database,
        routers that can communicate directly over the Point-to-
        MultiPoint network are joined by bidirectional edges, and
        each router also has a stub connection to its own IP
        interface address (which is in contrast to the
        representation of real point-to-point links; see Figure 1a).
        On some non-broadcast networks, use of Point-to-MultiPoint
        mode and data-link protocols such as Inverse ARP (see
        [Ref14]) will allow autodiscovery of OSPF neighbors even
        though broadcast support is not available.
                                              **FROM**
            +---+      +---+
            |RT3|      |RT4|              |RT3|RT4|RT5|RT6|
            +---+      +---+        *  --------------------
            I3|    N2    |I4        *  RT3|   | X | X | X |
        +----------------------+    T  RT4| X |   |   | X |
            I5|          |I6        O  RT5| X |   |   | X |
            +---+      +---+        *  RT6| X | X | X |   |
            |RT5|      |RT6|        *   I3| X |   |   |   |
            +---+      +---+            I4|   | X |   |   |
                                        I5|   |   | X |   |
                                        I6|   |   |   | X |
                Figure 1b: Network map components
                   Point-to-MultiPoint networks
         All routers can communicate directly over N2, except
            routers RT4 and RT5. I3 through I6 indicate IP
                       interface addresses
    2.1.2.  An example link-state database
        Figure 2 shows a sample map of an Autonomous System.  The
        rectangle labelled H1 indicates a host, which has a SLIP
        connection to Router RT12.  Router RT12 is therefore
        advertising a host route.  Lines between routers indicate
        physical point-to-point networks.  The only point-to-point
        network that has been assigned interface addresses is the
        one joining Routers RT6 and RT10.  Routers RT5 and RT7 have
        BGP connections to other Autonomous Systems.  A set of BGP-
        learned routes have been displayed for both of these
        routers.
        A cost is associated with the output side of each router
        interface.  This cost is configurable by the system
        administrator.  The lower the cost, the more likely the
        interface is to be used to forward data traffic.  Costs are
        also associated with the externally derived routing data
        (e.g., the BGP-learned routes).
        The directed graph resulting from the map in Figure 2 is
        depicted in Figure 3.  Arcs are labelled with the cost of
        the corresponding router output interface.  Arcs having no
        labelled cost have a cost of 0.  Note that arcs leading from
        networks to routers always have cost 0; they are significant
        nonetheless.  Note also that the externally derived routing
        data appears on the graph as stubs.
        The link-state database is pieced together from LSAs
        generated by the routers.  In the associated graphical
        representation, the neighborhood of each router or transit
        network is represented in a single, separate LSA.  Figure 4
        shows these LSAs graphically. Router RT12 has an interface
        to two broadcast networks and a SLIP line to a host.
        Network N6 is a broadcast network with three attached
        routers.  The cost of all links from Network N6 to its
        attached routers is 0.  Note that the LSA for Network N6 is
        actually generated by one of the network's attached routers:
        the router that has been elected Designated Router for the
        network.
             +
             | 3+---+                     N12      N14
           N1|--|RT1|\ 1                    \ N13 /
             |  +---+ \                     8\ |8/8
             +         \ ____                 \|/
                        /    \   1+---+8    8+---+6
                       *  N3  *---|RT4|------|RT5|--------+
                        \____/    +---+      +---+        |
              +         /   |                  |7         |
              | 3+---+ /    |                  |          |
            N2|--|RT2|/1    |1                 |6         |
              |  +---+    +---+8            6+---+        |
              +           |RT3|--------------|RT6|        |
                          +---+              +---+        |
                            |2               Ia|7         |
                            |                  |          |
                       +---------+             |          |
                           N4                  |          |
                                               |          |
                                               |          |
                   N11                         |          |
               +---------+                     |          |
                    |                          |          |    N12
                    |3                         |          |6 2/
                  +---+                        |        +---+/
                  |RT9|                        |        |RT7|---N15
                  +---+                        |        +---+ 9
                    |1                   +     |          |1
                   _|__                  |   Ib|5       __|_
                  /    \      1+----+2   |  3+----+1   /    \
                 *  N9  *------|RT11|----|---|RT10|---*  N6  *
                  \____/       +----+    |   +----+    \____/
                    |                    |                |
                    |1                   +                |1
         +--+   10+----+                N8              +---+
         |H1|-----|RT12|                                |RT8|
         +--+SLIP +----+                                +---+
                    |2                                    |4
                    |                                     |
               +---------+                            +--------+
                   N10                                    N7
                Figure 2: A sample Autonomous System
                            **FROM**
             |RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|
             |1 |2 |3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |8 |9 |10|11|12|N3|N6|N8|N9|
          ----- ---------------------------------------------
          RT1|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |  |  |  |
          RT2|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |  |  |  |
          RT3|  |  |  |  |  |6 |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |  |  |  |
          RT4|  |  |  |  |8 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |  |  |  |
          RT5|  |  |  |8 |  |6 |6 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
          RT6|  |  |8 |  |7 |  |  |  |  |5 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
          RT7|  |  |  |  |6 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |  |  |
      *   RT8|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |  |  |
      *   RT9|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |
      T  RT10|  |  |  |  |  |7 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |0 |  |
      O  RT11|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |0 |
      *  RT12|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |
      *    N1|3 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
           N2|  |3 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
           N3|1 |1 |1 |1 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
           N4|  |  |2 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
           N6|  |  |  |  |  |  |1 |1 |  |1 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
           N7|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |4 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
           N8|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |3 |2 |  |  |  |  |  |
           N9|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |1 |  |1 |1 |  |  |  |  |
          N10|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |2 |  |  |  |  |
          N11|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |3 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
          N12|  |  |  |  |8 |  |2 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
          N13|  |  |  |  |8 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
          N14|  |  |  |  |8 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
          N15|  |  |  |  |  |  |9 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
           H1|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |10|  |  |  |  |
                 Figure 3: The resulting directed graph
             Networks and routers are represented by vertices.
             An edge of cost X connects Vertex A to Vertex B iff
             the intersection of Column A and Row B is marked
                                 with an X.
                 **FROM**                       **FROM**
              |RT12|N9|N10|H1|                 |RT9|RT11|RT12|N9|
       *  --------------------          *  ----------------------
       *  RT12|    |  |   |  |          *   RT9|   |    |    |0 |
       T    N9|1   |  |   |  |          T  RT11|   |    |    |0 |
       O   N10|2   |  |   |  |          O  RT12|   |    |    |0 |
       *    H1|10  |  |   |  |          *    N9|   |    |    |  |
       *                                *
            RT12's router-LSA              N9's network-LSA
              Figure 4: Individual link state components
          Networks and routers are represented by vertices.
          An edge of cost X connects Vertex A to Vertex B iff
          the intersection of Column A and Row B is marked
                              with an X.
2.2.  The shortest-path tree
    When no OSPF areas are configured, each router in the Autonomous
    System has an identical link-state database, leading to an
    identical graphical representation.  A router generates its
    routing table from this graph by calculating a tree of shortest
    paths with the router itself as root.  Obviously, the shortest-
    path tree depends on the router doing the calculation.  The
    shortest-path tree for Router RT6 in our example is depicted in
    Figure 5.
    The tree gives the entire path to any destination network or
    host.  However, only the next hop to the destination is used in
    the forwarding process.  Note also that the best route to any
    router has also been calculated.  For the processing of external
    data, we note the next hop and distance to any router
    advertising external routes.  The resulting routing table for
    Router RT6 is pictured in Table 2.  Note that there is a
    separate route for each end of a numbered point-to-point network
    (in this case, the serial line between Routers RT6 and RT10).
    Routes to networks belonging to other AS'es (such as N12) appear
    as dashed lines on the shortest path tree in Figure 5.  Use of
                            RT6(origin)
                RT5 o------------o-----------o Ib
                   /|\    6      |\     7
                 8/8|8\          | \
                 /  |  \        6|  \
                o   |   o        |   \7
               N12  o  N14       |    \
                   N13        2  |     \
                        N4 o-----o RT3  \
                                /        \    5
                              1/     RT10 o-------o Ia
                              /           |\
                   RT4 o-----o N3        3| \1
                            /|            |  \ N6     RT7
                           / |         N8 o   o---------o
                          /  |            |   |        /|
                     RT2 o   o RT1        |   |      2/ |9
                        /    |            |   |RT8   /  |
                       /3    |3      RT11 o   o     o   o
                      /      |            |   |    N12 N15
                  N2 o       o N1        1|   |4
                                          |   |
                                       N9 o   o N7
                                         /|
                                        / |
                    N11      RT9       /  |RT12
                     o--------o-------o   o--------o H1
                         3                |   10
                                          |2
                                          |
                                          o N10
                 Figure 5: The SPF tree for Router RT6
          Edges that are not marked with a cost have a cost of
          of zero (these are network-to-router links). Routes
          to networks N12-N15 are external information that is
                     considered in Section 2.3
               Destination   Next  Hop   Distance
               __________________________________
               N1            RT3         10
               N2            RT3         10
               N3            RT3         7
               N4            RT3         8
               Ib            *           7
               Ia            RT10        12
               N6            RT10        8
               N7            RT10        12
               N8            RT10        10
               N9            RT10        11
               N10           RT10        13
               N11           RT10        14
               H1            RT10        21
               __________________________________
               RT5           RT5         6
               RT7           RT10        8
Table 2: The portion of Router RT6's routing table listing local
                         destinations.
    this externally derived routing information is considered in the
    next section.
2.3.  Use of external routing information
    After the tree is created the external routing information is
    examined.  This external routing information may originate from
    another routing protocol such as BGP, or be statically
    configured (static routes).  Default routes can also be included
    as part of the Autonomous System's external routing information.
    External routing information is flooded unaltered throughout the
    AS.  In our example, all the routers in the Autonomous System
    know that Router RT7 has two external routes, with metrics 2 and
    9.
    OSPF supports two types of external metrics.  Type 1 external
    metrics are expressed in the same units as OSPF interface cost
    (i.e., in terms of the link state metric).  Type 2 external
    metrics are an order of magnitude larger; any Type 2 metric is
    considered greater than the cost of any path internal to the AS.
    Use of Type 2 external metrics assumes that routing between
    AS'es is the major cost of routing a packet, and eliminates the
    need for conversion of external costs to internal link state
    metrics.
    As an example of Type 1 external metric processing, suppose that
    the Routers RT7 and RT5 in Figure 2 are advertising Type 1
    external metrics.  For each advertised external route, the total
    cost from Router RT6 is calculated as the sum of the external
    route's advertised cost and the distance from Router RT6 to the
    advertising router.  When two routers are advertising the same
    external destination, RT6 picks the advertising router providing
    the minimum total cost. RT6 then sets the next hop to the
    external destination equal to the next hop that would be used
    when routing packets to the chosen advertising router.
    In Figure 2, both Router RT5 and RT7 are advertising an external
    route to destination Network N12.  Router RT7 is preferred since
    it is advertising N12 at a distance of 10 (8+2) to Router RT6,
    which is better than Router RT5's 14 (6+8).  Table 3 shows the
    entries that are added to the routing table when external routes
    are examined:
                     Destination   Next  Hop   Distance
                     __________________________________
                     N12           RT10        10
                     N13           RT5         14
                     N14           RT5         14
                     N15           RT10        17
             Table 3: The portion of Router RT6's routing table
                       listing external destinations.
    Processing of Type 2 external metrics is simpler.  The AS
    boundary router advertising the smallest external metric is
    chosen, regardless of the internal distance to the AS boundary
    router.  Suppose in our example both Router RT5 and Router RT7
    were advertising Type 2 external routes.  Then all traffic
    destined for Network N12 would be forwarded to Router RT7, since
    2 < 8.  When several equal-cost Type 2 routes exist, the
    internal distance to the advertising routers is used to break
    the tie.
    Both Type 1 and Type 2 external metrics can be present in the AS
    at the same time.  In that event, Type 1 external metrics always
    take precedence.
    This section has assumed that packets destined for external
    destinations are always routed through the advertising AS
    boundary router.  This is not always desirable.  For example,
    suppose in Figure 2 there is an additional router attached to
    Network N6, called Router RTX.  Suppose further that RTX does
    not participate in OSPF routing, but does exchange BGP
    information with the AS boundary router RT7.  Then, Router RT7
    would end up advertising OSPF external routes for all
    destinations that should be routed to RTX.  An extra hop will
    sometimes be introduced if packets for these destinations need
    always be routed first to Router RT7 (the advertising router).
    To deal with this situation, the OSPF protocol allows an AS
    boundary router to specify a "forwarding address" in its AS-
    external-LSAs.  In the above example, Router RT7 would specify
    RTX's IP address as the "forwarding address" for all those
    destinations whose packets should be routed directly to RTX.
    The "forwarding address" has one other application.  It enables
    routers in the Autonomous System's interior to function as
    "route servers".  For example, in Figure 2 the router RT6 could
    become a route server, gaining external routing information
    through a combination of static configuration and external
    routing protocols.  RT6 would then start advertising itself as
    an AS boundary router, and would originate a collection of OSPF
    AS-external-LSAs.  In each AS-external-LSA, Router RT6 would
    specify the correct Autonomous System exit point to use for the
    destination through appropriate setting of the LSA's "forwarding
    address" field.
2.4.  Equal-cost multipath
    The above discussion has been simplified by considering only a
    single route to any destination.  In reality, if multiple
    equal-cost routes to a destination exist, they are all
    discovered and used.  This requires no conceptual changes to the
    algorithm, and its discussion is postponed until we consider the
    tree-building process in more detail.
    With equal cost multipath, a router potentially has several
    available next hops towards any given destination.

Splitting the AS into Areas

OSPF allows collections of contiguous networks and hosts to be
grouped together.  Such a group, together with the routers having
interfaces to any one of the included networks, is called an area.
Each area runs a separate copy of the basic link-state routing
algorithm.  This means that each area has its own link-state
database and corresponding graph, as explained in the previous
section.
The topology of an area is invisible from the outside of the area.
Conversely, routers internal to a given area know nothing of the
detailed topology external to the area.  This isolation of knowledge
enables the protocol to effect a marked reduction in routing traffic
as compared to treating the entire Autonomous System as a single
link-state domain.
With the introduction of areas, it is no longer true that all
routers in the AS have an identical link-state database.  A router
actually has a separate link-state database for each area it is
connected to.  (Routers connected to multiple areas are called area
border routers).  Two routers belonging to the same area have, for
that area, identical area link-state databases.
Routing in the Autonomous System takes place on two levels,
depending on whether the source and destination of a packet reside
in the same area (intra-area routing is used) or different areas
(inter-area routing is used).  In intra-area routing, the packet is
routed solely on information obtained within the area; no routing
information obtained from outside the area can be used.  This
protects intra-area routing from the injection of bad routing
information.  We discuss inter-area routing in Section 3.2.
3.1.  The backbone of the Autonomous System
    The OSPF backbone is the special OSPF Area 0 (often written as
    Area 0.0.0.0, since OSPF Area ID's are typically formatted as IP
    addresses). The OSPF backbone always contains all area border
    routers. The backbone is responsible for distributing routing
    information between non-backbone areas. The backbone must be
    contiguous. However, it need not be physically contiguous;
    backbone connectivity can be established/maintained through the
    configuration of virtual links.
    Virtual links can be configured between any two backbone routers
    that have an interface to a common non-backbone area.  Virtual
    links belong to the backbone.  The protocol treats two routers
    joined by a virtual link as if they were connected by an
    unnumbered point-to-point backbone network.  On the graph of the
    backbone, two such routers are joined by arcs whose costs are
    the intra-area distances between the two routers.  The routing
    protocol traffic that flows along the virtual link uses intra-
    area routing only.
3.2.  Inter-area routing
    When routing a packet between two non-backbone areas the
    backbone is used.  The path that the packet will travel can be
    broken up into three contiguous pieces: an intra-area path from
    the source to an area border router, a backbone path between the
    source and destination areas, and then another intra-area path
    to the destination.  The algorithm finds the set of such paths
    that have the smallest cost.
    Looking at this another way, inter-area routing can be pictured
    as forcing a star configuration on the Autonomous System, with
    the backbone as hub and each of the non-backbone areas as
    spokes.
    The topology of the backbone dictates the backbone paths used
    between areas.  The topology of the backbone can be enhanced by
    adding virtual links.  This gives the system administrator some
    control over the routes taken by inter-area traffic.
    The correct area border router to use as the packet exits the
    source area is chosen in exactly the same way routers
    advertising external routes are chosen.  Each area border router
    in an area summarizes for the area its cost to all networks
    external to the area.  After the SPF tree is calculated for the
    area, routes to all inter-area destinations are calculated by
    examining the summaries of the area border routers.
3.3.  Classification of routers
    Before the introduction of areas, the only OSPF routers having a
    specialized function were those advertising external routing
    information, such as Router RT5 in Figure 2.  When the AS is
    split into OSPF areas, the routers are further divided according
    to function into the following four overlapping categories:
    Internal routers
        A router with all directly connected networks belonging to
        the same area. These routers run a single copy of the basic
        routing algorithm.
    Area border routers
        A router that attaches to multiple areas.  Area border
        routers run multiple copies of the basic algorithm, one copy
        for each attached area. Area border routers condense the
        topological information of their attached areas for
        distribution to the backbone.  The backbone in turn
        distributes the information to the other areas.
    Backbone routers
        A router that has an interface to the backbone area.  This
        includes all routers that interface to more than one area
        (i.e., area border routers).  However, backbone routers do
        not have to be area border routers.  Routers with all
        interfaces connecting to the backbone area are supported.
    AS boundary routers
        A router that exchanges routing information with routers
        belonging to other Autonomous Systems.  Such a router
        advertises AS external routing information throughout the
        Autonomous System.  The paths to each AS boundary router are
        known by every router in the AS.  This classification is
        completely independent of the previous classifications: AS
        boundary routers may be internal or area border routers, and
        may or may not participate in the backbone.
3.4.  A sample area configuration
    Figure 6 shows a sample area configuration.  The first area
    consists of networks N1-N4, along with their attached routers
    RT1-RT4.  The second area consists of networks N6-N8, along with
    their attached routers RT7, RT8, RT10 and RT11.  The third area
    consists of networks N9-N11 and Host H1, along with their
    attached routers RT9, RT11 and RT12.  The third area has been
    configured so that networks N9-N11 and Host H1 will all be
    grouped into a single route, when advertised external to the
    area (see Section 3.5 for more details).
    In Figure 6, Routers RT1, RT2, RT5, RT6, RT8, RT9 and RT12 are
    internal routers.  Routers RT3, RT4, RT7, RT10 and RT11 are area
    border routers.  Finally, as before, Routers RT5 and RT7 are AS
    boundary routers.
    Figure 7 shows the resulting link-state database for the Area 1.
    The figure completely describes that area's intra-area routing.
    It also shows the complete view of the internet for the two
    internal routers RT1 and RT2.  It is the job of the area border
    routers, RT3 and RT4, to advertise into Area 1 the distances to
    all destinations external to the area.  These are indicated in
    Figure 7 by the dashed stub routes.  Also, RT3 and RT4 must
    advertise into Area 1 the location of the AS boundary routers
    RT5 and RT7.  Finally, AS-external-LSAs from RT5 and RT7 are
    flooded throughout the entire AS, and in particular throughout
    Area 1.  These LSAs are included in Area 1's database, and yield
    routes to Networks N12-N15.
    Routers RT3 and RT4 must also summarize Area 1's topology for
         .   +                     .
         .   | 3+---+              .      N12      N14
         . N1|--|RT1|\ 1           .        \ N13 /
         .   |  +---+ \            .        8\ |8/8
         .   +         \ ____      .          \|/
         .              /    \   1+---+8    8+---+6
         .             *  N3  *---|RT4|------|RT5|--------+
         .              \____/    +---+      +---+        |
         .    +         /      \   .           |7         |
         .    | 3+---+ /        \  .           |          |
         .  N2|--|RT2|/1        1\ .           |6         |
         .    |  +---+            +---+8    6+---+        |
         .    +                   |RT3|------|RT6|        |
         .                        +---+      +---+        |
         .                      2/ .         Ia|7         |
         .                      /  .           |          |
         .             +---------+ .           |          |
         .Area 1           N4      .           |          |
      .            N11         .               |          |
      .        +---------+     .               |          |
      .             |          .               |          |    N12
      .             |3         .             Ib|5         |6 2/
      .           +---+        .             +----+     +---+/
      .           +---+        .    .        +----+     +---+ 9    .
      .             |1         .    .    +  /3    1\      |1       .
      .            _|__        .    .    | /        \   __|_       .
      .           /    \      1+----+2   |/          \ /    \      .
      .          *  N9  *------|RT11|----|            *  N6  *     .
      .           \____/       +----+    |             \____/      .
      .             |          .    .    |                |        .
      .             |1         .    .    +                |1       .
      .  +--+   10+----+       .    .   N8              +---+      .
      .  |H1|-----|RT12|       .    .                   |RT8|      .
      .  +--+SLIP +----+       .    .                   +---+      .
      .             |2         .    .                     |4       .
      .             |          .    .                     |        .
      .        +---------+     .    .                 +--------+   .
      .            N10         .    .                     N7       .
      .                        .    .Area 2                        .
                Figure 6: A sample OSPF area configuration
    distribution to the backbone.  Their backbone LSAs are shown in
    Table 4.  These summaries show which networks are contained in
    Area 1 (i.e., Networks N1-N4), and the distance to these
    networks from the routers RT3 and RT4 respectively.
    The link-state database for the backbone is shown in Figure 8.
    The set of routers pictured are the backbone routers.  Router
    RT11 is a backbone router because it belongs to two areas.  In
    order to make the backbone connected, a virtual link has been
    configured between Routers R10 and R11.
    The area border routers RT3, RT4, RT7, RT10 and RT11 condense
    the routing information of their attached non-backbone areas for
    distribution via the backbone; these are the dashed stubs that
    appear in Figure 8.  Remember that the third area has been
    configured to condense Networks N9-N11 and Host H1 into a single
    route.  This yields a single dashed line for networks N9-N11 and
    Host H1 in Figure 8.  Routers RT5 and RT7 are AS boundary
    routers; their externally derived information also appears on
    the graph in Figure 8 as stubs.
                 Network   RT3 adv.   RT4 adv.
                 _____________________________
                 N1        4          4
                 N2        4          4
                 N3        1          1
                 N4        2          3
          Table 4: Networks advertised to the backbone
                    by Routers RT3 and RT4.
                           **FROM**
                      |RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|
                      |1 |2 |3 |4 |5 |7 |N3|
                   ----- -------------------
                   RT1|  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |
                   RT2|  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |
                   RT3|  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |
               *   RT4|  |  |  |  |  |  |0 |
               *   RT5|  |  |14|8 |  |  |  |
               T   RT7|  |  |20|14|  |  |  |
               O    N1|3 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
               *    N2|  |3 |  |  |  |  |  |
               *    N3|1 |1 |1 |1 |  |  |  |
                    N4|  |  |2 |  |  |  |  |
                 Ia,Ib|  |  |20|27|  |  |  |
                    N6|  |  |16|15|  |  |  |
                    N7|  |  |20|19|  |  |  |
                    N8|  |  |18|18|  |  |  |
             N9-N11,H1|  |  |29|36|  |  |  |
                   N12|  |  |  |  |8 |2 |  |
                   N13|  |  |  |  |8 |  |  |
                   N14|  |  |  |  |8 |  |  |
                   N15|  |  |  |  |  |9 |  |
                  Figure 7: Area 1's Database.
          Networks and routers are represented by vertices.
          An edge of cost X connects Vertex A to Vertex B iff
          the intersection of Column A and Row B is marked
                           with an X.
                              **FROM**
                        |RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|RT|RT
                        |3 |4 |5 |6 |7 |10|11|
                     ------------------------
                     RT3|  |  |  |6 |  |  |  |
                     RT4|  |  |8 |  |  |  |  |
                     RT5|  |8 |  |6 |6 |  |  |
                     RT6|8 |  |7 |  |  |5 |  |
                     RT7|  |  |6 |  |  |  |  |
                 *  RT10|  |  |  |7 |  |  |2 |
                 *  RT11|  |  |  |  |  |3 |  |
                 T    N1|4 |4 |  |  |  |  |  |
                 O    N2|4 |4 |  |  |  |  |  |
                 *    N3|1 |1 |  |  |  |  |  |
                 *    N4|2 |3 |  |  |  |  |  |
                      Ia|  |  |  |  |  |5 |  |
                      Ib|  |  |  |7 |  |  |  |
                      N6|  |  |  |  |1 |1 |3 |
                      N7|  |  |  |  |5 |5 |7 |
                      N8|  |  |  |  |4 |3 |2 |
               N9-N11,H1|  |  |  |  |  |  |11|
                     N12|  |  |8 |  |2 |  |  |
                     N13|  |  |8 |  |  |  |  |
                     N14|  |  |8 |  |  |  |  |
                     N15|  |  |  |  |9 |  |  |
                 Figure 8: The backbone's database.
          Networks and routers are represented by vertices.
          An edge of cost X connects Vertex A to Vertex B iff
          the intersection of Column A and Row B is marked
                             with an X.
    The backbone enables the exchange of summary information between
    area border routers.  Every area border router hears the area
    summaries from all other area border routers.  It then forms a
    picture of the distance to all networks outside of its area by
    examining the collected LSAs, and adding in the backbone
    distance to each advertising router.
    Again using Routers RT3 and RT4 as an example, the procedure
    goes as follows: They first calculate the SPF tree for the
    backbone.  This gives the distances to all other area border
    routers.  Also noted are the distances to networks (Ia and Ib)
    and AS boundary routers (RT5 and RT7) that belong to the
    backbone.  This calculation is shown in Table 5.
    Next, by looking at the area summaries from these area border
    routers, RT3 and RT4 can determine the distance to all networks
    outside their area.  These distances are then advertised
    internally to the area by RT3 and RT4.  The advertisements that
    Router RT3 and RT4 will make into Area 1 are shown in Table 6.
    Note that Table 6 assumes that an area range has been configured
    for the backbone which groups Ia and Ib into a single LSA.
    The information imported into Area 1 by Routers RT3 and RT4
    enables an internal router, such as RT1, to choose an area
    border router intelligently.  Router RT1 would use RT4 for
    traffic to Network N6, RT3 for traffic to Network N10, and would
                          dist  from   dist  from
                          RT3          RT4
               __________________________________
               to  RT3    *            21
               to  RT4    22           *
               to  RT7    20           14
               to  RT10   15           22
               to  RT11   18           25
               __________________________________
               to  Ia     20           27
               to  Ib     15           22
               __________________________________
               to  RT5    14           8
               to  RT7    20           14
             Table 5: Backbone distances calculated
                    by Routers RT3 and RT4.
               Destination   RT3 adv.   RT4 adv.
               _________________________________
               Ia,Ib         20         27
               N6            16         15
               N7            20         19
               N8            18         18
               N9-N11,H1     29         36
               _________________________________
               RT5           14         8
               RT7           20         14
          Table 6: Destinations advertised into Area 1
                    by Routers RT3 and RT4.
    load share between the two for traffic to Network N8.
    Router RT1 can also determine in this manner the shortest path
    to the AS boundary routers RT5 and RT7.  Then, by looking at RT5
    and RT7's AS-external-LSAs, Router RT1 can decide between RT5 or
    RT7 when sending to a destination in another Autonomous System
    (one of the networks N12-N15).
    Note that a failure of the line between Routers RT6 and RT10
    will cause the backbone to become disconnected.  Configuring a
    virtual link between Routers RT7 and RT10 will give the backbone
    more connectivity and more resistance to such failures.
3.5.  IP subnetting support
    OSPF attaches an IP address mask to each advertised route.  The
    mask indicates the range of addresses being described by the
    particular route.  For example, a summary-LSA for the
    destination 128.185.0.0 with a mask of 0xffff0000 actually is
    describing a single route to the collection of destinations
    128.185.0.0 - 128.185.255.255.  Similarly, host routes are
    always advertised with a mask of 0xffffffff, indicating the
    presence of only a single destination.
    Including the mask with each advertised destination enables the
    implementation of what is commonly referred to as variable-
    length subnetting.  This means that a single IP class A, B, or C
    network number can be broken up into many subnets of various
    sizes.  For example, the network 128.185.0.0 could be broken up
    into 62 variable-sized subnets: 15 subnets of size 4K, 15
    subnets of size 256, and 32 subnets of size 8.  Table 7 shows
    some of the resulting network addresses together with their
    masks.
              Network address   IP address mask   Subnet size
              _______________________________________________
              128.185.16.0      0xfffff000        4K
              128.185.1.0       0xffffff00        256
              128.185.0.8       0xfffffff8        8
                     Table 7: Some sample subnet sizes.
    There are many possible ways of dividing up a class A, B, and C
    network into variable sized subnets.  The precise procedure for
    doing so is beyond the scope of this specification.  This
    specification however establishes the following guideline: When
    an IP packet is forwarded, it is always forwarded to the network
    that is the best match for the packet's destination.  Here best
    match is synonymous with the longest or most specific match.
    For example, the default route with destination of 0.0.0.0 and
    mask 0x00000000 is always a match for every IP destination.  Yet
    it is always less specific than any other match.  Subnet masks
    must be assigned so that the best match for any IP destination
    is unambiguous.
    Attaching an address mask to each route also enables the support
    of IP supernetting. For example, a single physical network
    segment could be assigned the [address,mask] pair
    [192.9.4.0,0xfffffc00]. The segment would then be single IP
    network, containing addresses from the four consecutive class C
    network numbers 192.9.4.0 through 192.9.7.0. Such addressing is
    now becoming commonplace with the advent of CIDR (see [Ref10]).
    In order to get better aggregation at area boundaries, area
    address ranges can be employed (see Section C.2 for more
    details).  Each address range is defined as an [address,mask]
    pair.  Many separate networks may then be contained in a single
    address range, just as a subnetted network is composed of many
    separate subnets.  Area border routers then summarize the area
    contents (for distribution to the backbone) by advertising a
    single route for each address range.  The cost of the route is
    the maximum cost to any of the networks falling in the specified
    range.
    For example, an IP subnetted network might be configured as a
    single OSPF area.  In that case, a single address range could be
    configured:  a class A, B, or C network number along with its
    natural IP mask.  Inside the area, any number of variable sized
    subnets could be defined.  However, external to the area a
    single route for the entire subnetted network would be
    distributed, hiding even the fact that the network is subnetted
    at all.  The cost of this route is the maximum of the set of
    costs to the component subnets.
3.6.  Supporting stub areas
    In some Autonomous Systems, the majority of the link-state
    database may consist of AS-external-LSAs.  An OSPF AS-external-
    LSA is usually flooded throughout the entire AS.  However, OSPF
    allows certain areas to be configured as "stub areas".  AS-
    external-LSAs are not flooded into/throughout stub areas;
    routing to AS external destinations in these areas is based on a
    (per-area) default only.  This reduces the link-state database
    size, and therefore the memory requirements, for a stub area's
    internal routers.
    In order to take advantage of the OSPF stub area support,
    default routing must be used in the stub area.  This is
    accomplished as follows.  One or more of the stub area's area
    border routers must advertise a default route into the stub area
    via summary-LSAs.  These summary defaults are flooded throughout
    the stub area, but no further.  (For this reason these defaults
    pertain only to the particular stub area).  These summary
    default routes will be used for any destination that is not
    explicitly reachable by an intra-area or inter-area path (i.e.,
    AS external destinations).
    An area can be configured as a stub when there is a single exit
    point from the area, or when the choice of exit point need not
    be made on a per-external-destination basis.  For example, Area
    3 in Figure 6 could be configured as a stub area, because all
    external traffic must travel though its single area border
    router RT11.  If Area 3 were configured as a stub, Router RT11
    would advertise a default route for distribution inside Area 3
    (in a summary-LSA), instead of flooding the AS-external-LSAs for
    Networks N12-N15 into/throughout the area.
    The OSPF protocol ensures that all routers belonging to an area
    agree on whether the area has been configured as a stub.  This
    guarantees that no confusion will arise in the flooding of AS-
    external-LSAs.
    There are a couple of restrictions on the use of stub areas.
    Virtual links cannot be configured through stub areas.  In
    addition, AS boundary routers cannot be placed internal to stub
    areas.
3.7.  Partitions of areas
    OSPF does not actively attempt to repair area partitions.  When
    an area becomes partitioned, each component simply becomes a
    separate area.  The backbone then performs routing between the
    new areas.  Some destinations reachable via intra-area routing
    before the partition will now require inter-area routing.
    However, in order to maintain full routing after the partition,
    an address range must not be split across multiple components of
    the area partition. Also, the backbone itself must not
    partition.  If it does, parts of the Autonomous System will
    become unreachable.  Backbone partitions can be repaired by
    configuring virtual links (see Section 15).
    Another way to think about area partitions is to look at the
    Autonomous System graph that was introduced in Section 2.  Area
    IDs can be viewed as colors for the graph's edges.[1] Each edge
    of the graph connects to a network, or is itself a point-to-
    point network.  In either case, the edge is colored with the
    network's Area ID.
    A group of edges, all having the same color, and interconnected
    by vertices, represents an area.  If the topology of the
    Autonomous System is intact, the graph will have several regions
    of color, each color being a distinct Area ID.
    When the AS topology changes, one of the areas may become
    partitioned.  The graph of the AS will then have multiple
    regions of the same color (Area ID).  The routing in the
    Autonomous System will continue to function as long as these
    regions of same color are connected by the single backbone
    region.

Functional Summary

A separate copy of OSPF's basic routing algorithm runs in each area.
Routers having interfaces to multiple areas run multiple copies of
the algorithm.  A brief summary of the routing algorithm follows.
When a router starts, it first initializes the routing protocol data
structures.  The router then waits for indications from the lower-
level protocols that its interfaces are functional.
A router then uses the OSPF's Hello Protocol to acquire neighbors.
The router sends Hello packets to its neighbors, and in turn
receives their Hello packets.  On broadcast and point-to-point
networks, the router dynamically detects its neighboring routers by
sending its Hello packets to the multicast address AllSPFRouters.
On non-broadcast networks, some configuration information may be
necessary in order to discover neighbors.  On broadcast and NBMA
networks the Hello Protocol also elects a Designated router for the
network.
The router will attempt to form adjacencies with some of its newly
acquired neighbors.  Link-state databases are synchronized between
pairs of adjacent routers.  On broadcast and NBMA networks, the
Designated Router determines which routers should become adjacent.
Adjacencies control the distribution of routing information.
Routing updates are sent and received only on adjacencies.
A router periodically advertises its state, which is also called
link state.  Link state is also advertised when a router's state
changes.  A router's adjacencies are reflected in the contents of
its LSAs.  This relationship between adjacencies and link state
allows the protocol to detect dead routers in a timely fashion.
LSAs are flooded throughout the area.  The flooding algorithm is
reliable, ensuring that all routers in an area have exactly the same
link-state database.  This database consists of the collection of
LSAs originated by each router belonging to the area.  From this
database each router calculates a shortest-path tree, with itself as
root.  This shortest-path tree in turn yields a routing table for
the protocol.
4.1.  Inter-area routing
    The previous section described the operation of the protocol
    within a single area.  For intra-area routing, no other routing
    information is pertinent.  In order to be able to route to
    destinations outside of the area, the area border routers inject
    additional routing information into the area.  This additional
    information is a distillation of the rest of the Autonomous
    System's topology.
    This distillation is accomplished as follows: Each area border
    router is by definition connected to the backbone.  Each area
    border router summarizes the topology of its attached non-
    backbone areas for transmission on the backbone, and hence to
    all other area border routers.  An area border router then has
    complete topological information concerning the backbone, and
    the area summaries from each of the other area border routers.
    From this information, the router calculates paths to all
    inter-area destinations.  The router then advertises these paths
    into its attached areas.  This enables the area's internal
    routers to pick the best exit router when forwarding traffic
    inter-area destinations.
4.2.  AS external routes
    Routers that have information regarding other Autonomous Systems
    can flood this information throughout the AS.  This external
    routing information is distributed verbatim to every
    participating router.  There is one exception: external routing
    information is not flooded into "stub" areas (see Section 3.6).
    To utilize external routing information, the path to all routers
    advertising external information must be known throughout the AS
    (excepting the stub areas).  For that reason, the locations of
    these AS boundary routers are summarized by the (non-stub) area
    border routers.
4.3.  Routing protocol packets
    The OSPF protocol runs directly over IP, using IP protocol 89.
    OSPF does not provide any explicit fragmentation/reassembly
    support.  When fragmentation is necessary, IP
    fragmentation/reassembly is used.  OSPF protocol packets have
    been designed so that large protocol packets can generally be
    split into several smaller protocol packets.  This practice is
    recommended; IP fragmentation should be avoided whenever
    possible.
    Routing protocol packets should always be sent with the IP TOS
    field set to 0.  If at all possible, routing protocol packets
    should be given preference over regular IP data traffic, both
    when being sent and received.  As an aid to accomplishing this,
    OSPF protocol packets should have their IP precedence field set
    to the value Internetwork Control (see [Ref5]).
    All OSPF protocol packets share a common protocol header that is
    described in Appendix A.  The OSPF packet types are listed below
    in Table 8.  Their formats are also described in Appendix A.
         Type   Packet  name           Protocol  function
         __________________________________________________________
         1      Hello                  Discover/maintain  neighbors
         2      Database Description   Summarize database contents
         3      Link State Request     Database download
         4      Link State Update      Database update
         5      Link State Ack         Flooding acknowledgment
                        Table 8: OSPF packet types.
    OSPF's Hello protocol uses Hello packets to discover and
    maintain neighbor relationships.  The Database Description and
    Link State Request packets are used in the forming of
    adjacencies.  OSPF's reliable update mechanism is implemented by
    the Link State Update and Link State Acknowledgment packets.
    Each Link State Update packet carries a set of new link state
    advertisements (LSAs) one hop further away from their point of
    origination.  A single Link State Update packet may contain the
    LSAs of several routers.  Each LSA is tagged with the ID of the
    originating router and a checksum of its link state contents.
    Each LSA also has a type field; the different types of OSPF LSAs
    are listed below in Table 9.
    OSPF routing packets (with the exception of Hellos) are sent
    only over adjacencies.  This means that all OSPF protocol
    packets travel a single IP hop, except those that are sent over
    virtual adjacencies.  The IP source address of an OSPF protocol
    packet is one end of a router adjacency, and the IP destination
    address is either the other end of the adjacency or an IP
    multicast address.
4.4.  Basic implementation requirements
    An implementation of OSPF requires the following pieces of
    system support:
    Timers
        Two different kind of timers are required.  The first kind,
        called "single shot timers", fire once and cause a protocol
        event to be processed.  The second kind, called "interval
        timers", fire at continuous intervals.  These are used for
        the sending of packets at regular intervals.  A good example
        of this is the regular broadcast of Hello packets. The
        granularity of both kinds of timers is one second.
        Interval timers should be implemented to avoid drift.  In
        some router implementations, packet processing can affect
        timer execution.  When multiple routers are attached to a
        single network, all doing broadcasts, this can lead to the
        synchronization of routing packets (which should be
        avoided).  If timers cannot be implemented to avoid drift,
        small random amounts should be added to/subtracted from the
        interval timer at each firing.
    LS     LSA                LSA description
    type   name
    ________________________________________________________
    1      Router-LSAs        Originated by all routers.
                              This LSA describes
                              the collected states of the
                              router's interfaces to an
                              area. Flooded throughout a
                              single area only.
    ________________________________________________________
    2      Network-LSAs       Originated for broadcast
                              and NBMA networks by
                              the Designated Router. This
                              LSA contains the
                              list of routers connected
                              to the network. Flooded
                              throughout a single area only.
    ________________________________________________________
    3,4    Summary-LSAs       Originated by area border
                              routers, and flooded through-
                              out the LSA's associated
                              area. Each summary-LSA
                              describes a route to a
                              destination outside the area,
                              yet still inside the AS
                              (i.e., an inter-area route).
                              Type 3 summary-LSAs describe
                              routes to networks. Type 4
                              summary-LSAs describe
                              routes to AS boundary routers.
    ________________________________________________________
    5      AS-external-LSAs   Originated by AS boundary
                              routers, and flooded through-
                              out the AS. Each
                              AS-external-LSA describes
                              a route to a destination in
                              another Autonomous System.
                              Default routes for the AS can
                              also be described by
                              AS-external-LSAs.
        Table 9: OSPF link state advertisements (LSAs).
    IP multicast
        Certain OSPF packets take the form of IP multicast
        datagrams.  Support for receiving and sending IP multicast
        datagrams, along with the appropriate lower-level protocol
        support, is required.  The IP multicast datagrams used by
        OSPF never travel more than one hop. For this reason, the
        ability to forward IP multicast datagrams is not required.
        For information on IP multicast, see [Ref7].
    Variable-length subnet support
        The router's IP protocol support must include the ability to
        divide a single IP class A, B, or C network number into many
        subnets of various sizes.  This is commonly called
        variable-length subnetting; see Section 3.5 for details.
    IP supernetting support
        The router's IP protocol support must include the ability to
        aggregate contiguous collections of IP class A, B, and C
        networks into larger quantities called supernets.
        Supernetting has been proposed as one way to improve the
        scaling of IP routing in the worldwide Internet. For more
        information on IP supernetting, see [Ref10].
    Lower-level protocol support
        The lower level protocols referred to here are the network
        access protocols, such as the Ethernet data link layer.
        Indications must be passed from these protocols to OSPF as
        the network interface goes up and down.  For example, on an
        ethernet it would be valuable to know when the ethernet
        transceiver cable becomes unplugged.
    Non-broadcast lower-level protocol support
        On non-broadcast networks, the OSPF Hello Protocol can be
        aided by providing an indication when an attempt is made to
        send a packet to a dead or non-existent router.  For
        example, on an X.25 PDN a dead neighboring router may be
        indicated by the reception of a X.25 clear with an
        appropriate cause and diagnostic, and this information would
        be passed to OSPF.
    List manipulation primitives
        Much of the OSPF functionality is described in terms of its
        operation on lists of LSAs.  For example, the collection of
        LSAs that will be retransmitted to an adjacent router until
        acknowledged are described as a list.  Any particular LSA
        may be on many such lists.  An OSPF implementation needs to
        be able to manipulate these lists, adding and deleting
        constituent LSAs as necessary.
    Tasking support
        Certain procedures described in this specification invoke
        other procedures.  At times, these other procedures should
        be executed in-line, that is, before the current procedure
        is finished.  This is indicated in the text by instructions
        to execute a procedure.  At other times, the other
        procedures are to be executed only when the current
        procedure has finished.  This is indicated by instructions
        to schedule a task.
4.5.  Optional OSPF capabilities
    The OSPF protocol defines several optional capabilities.  A
    router indicates the optional capabilities that it supports in
    its OSPF Hello packets, Database Description packets and in its
    LSAs.  This enables routers supporting a mix of optional
    capabilities to coexist in a single Autonomous System.
    Some capabilities must be supported by all routers attached to a
    specific area.  In this case, a router will not accept a
    neighbor's Hello Packet unless there is a match in reported
    capabilities (i.e., a capability mismatch prevents a neighbor
    relationship from forming).  An example of this is the
    ExternalRoutingCapability (see below).
    Other capabilities can be negotiated during the Database
    Exchange process.  This is accomplished by specifying the
    optional capabilities in Database Description packets.  A
    capability mismatch with a neighbor in this case will result in
    only a subset of the link state database being exchanged between
    the two neighbors.
    The routing table build process can also be affected by the
    presence/absence of optional capabilities.  For example, since
    the optional capabilities are reported in LSAs, routers
    incapable of certain functions can be avoided when building the
    shortest path tree.
    The OSPF optional capabilities defined in this memo are listed
    below.  See Section A.2 for more information.
    ExternalRoutingCapability
        Entire OSPF areas can be configured as "stubs" (see Section
        3.6).  AS-external-LSAs will not be flooded into stub areas.
        This capability is represented by the E-bit in the OSPF
        Options field (see Section A.2).  In order to ensure
        consistent configuration of stub areas, all routers
        interfacing to such an area must have the E-bit clear in
        their Hello packets (see Sections 9.5 and 10.5).

Protocol Data Structures

The OSPF protocol is described herein in terms of its operation on
various protocol data structures.  The following list comprises the
top-level OSPF data structures.  Any initialization that needs to be
done is noted.  OSPF areas, interfaces and neighbors also have
associated data structures that are described later in this
specification.
Router ID
    A 32-bit number that uniquely identifies this router in the AS.
    One possible implementation strategy would be to use the
    smallest IP interface address belonging to the router. If a
    router's OSPF Router ID is changed, the router's OSPF software
    should be restarted before the new Router ID takes effect.  In
    this case the router should flush its self-originated LSAs from
    the routing domain (see Section 14.1) before restarting, or they
    will persist for up to MaxAge minutes.
Area structures
    Each one of the areas to which the router is connected has its
    own data structure.  This data structure describes the working
    of the basic OSPF algorithm.  Remember that each area runs a
    separate copy of the basic OSPF algorithm.
Backbone (area) structure
    The OSPF backbone area is responsible for the dissemination of
    inter-area routing information.
Virtual links configured
    The virtual links configured with this router as one endpoint.
    In order to have configured virtual links, the router itself
    must be an area border router.  Virtual links are identified by
    the Router ID of the other endpoint -- which is another area
    border router.  These two endpoint routers must be attached to a
    common area, called the virtual link's Transit area.  Virtual
    links are part of the backbone, and behave as if they were
    unnumbered point-to-point networks between the two routers.  A
    virtual link uses the intra-area routing of its Transit area to
    forward packets.  Virtual links are brought up and down through
    the building of the shortest-path trees for the Transit area.
List of external routes
    These are routes to destinations external to the Autonomous
    System, that have been gained either through direct experience
    with another routing protocol (such as BGP), or through
    configuration information, or through a combination of the two
    (e.g., dynamic external information to be advertised by OSPF
    with configured metric). Any router having these external routes
    is called an AS boundary router.  These routes are advertised by
    the router into the OSPF routing domain via AS-external-LSAs.
List of AS-external-LSAs
    Part of the link-state database.  These have originated from the
    AS boundary routers.  They comprise routes to destinations
    external to the Autonomous System.  Note that, if the router is
    itself an AS boundary router, some of these AS-external-LSAs
    have been self-originated.
The routing table
    Derived from the link-state database.  Each entry in the routing
    table is indexed by a destination, and contains the
    destination's cost and a set of paths to use in forwarding
    packets to the destination. A path is described by its type and
    next hop.  For more information, see Section 11.
Figure 9 shows the collection of data structures present in a
typical router.  The router pictured is RT10, from the map in Figure
6.  Note that Router RT10 has a virtual link configured to Router
RT11, with Area 2 as the link's Transit area.  This is indicated by
the dashed line in Figure 9.  When the virtual link becomes active,
through the building of the shortest path tree for Area 2, it
becomes an interface to the backbone (see the two backbone
interfaces depicted in Figure 9).

The Area Data Structure

The area data structure contains all the information used to run the
basic OSPF routing algorithm. Each area maintains its own link-state
database. A network belongs to a single area, and a router interface
connects to a single area. Each router adjacency also belongs to a
single area.
The OSPF backbone is the special OSPF area responsible for
disseminating inter-area routing information.
The area link-state database consists of the collection of router-
LSAs, network-LSAs and summary-LSAs that have originated from the
area's routers.  This information is flooded throughout a single
area only.  The list of AS-external-LSAs (see Section 5) is also
considered to be part of each area's link-state database.
Area ID
    A 32-bit number identifying the area. The Area ID of 0.0.0.0 is
    reserved for the backbone.
List of area address ranges
    In order to aggregate routing information at area boundaries,
    area address ranges can be employed. Each address range is
    specified by an [address,mask] pair and a status indication of
    either Advertise or DoNotAdvertise (see Section 12.4.3).
                          +----+
                          |RT10|------+
                          +----+       \+-------------+
                         /      \       |Routing Table|
                        /        \      +-------------+
                       /          \
          +------+    /            \    +--------+
          |Area 2|---+              +---|Backbone|
          +------+***********+          +--------+
         /        \           *        /          \
        /          \           *      /            \
   +---------+  +---------+    +------------+       +------------+
   |Interface|  |Interface|    |Virtual Link|       |Interface Ib|
   |  to N6  |  |  to N8  |    |   to RT11  |       +------------+
   +---------+  +---------+    +------------+             |
       /  \           |               |                   |
      /    \          |               |                   |

+--------+ +--------+ | +-------------+ +------------+ |Neighbor| |Neighbor| | |Neighbor RT11| |Neighbor RT6| | RT8 | | RT7 | | +-------------+ +------------+ +--------+ +--------+ |

                      |
                 +-------------+
                 |Neighbor RT11|
                 +-------------+
            Figure 9: Router RT10's Data structures
Associated router interfaces
    This router's interfaces connecting to the area.  A router
    interface belongs to one and only one area (or the backbone).
    For the backbone area this list includes all the virtual links.
    A virtual link is identified by the Router ID of its other
    endpoint; its cost is the cost of the shortest intra-area path
    through the Transit area that exists between the two routers.
List of router-LSAs
    A router-LSA is generated by each router in the area.  It
    describes the state of the router's interfaces to the area.
List of network-LSAs
    One network-LSA is generated for each transit broadcast and NBMA
    network in the area.  A network-LSA describes the set of routers
    currently connected to the network.
List of summary-LSAs
    Summary-LSAs originate from the area's area border routers.
    They describe routes to destinations internal to the Autonomous
    System, yet external to the area (i.e., inter-area
    destinations).
Shortest-path tree
    The shortest-path tree for the area, with this router itself as
    root.  Derived from the collected router-LSAs and network-LSAs
    by the Dijkstra algorithm (see Section 16.1).
TransitCapability
    This parameter indicates whether the area can carry data traffic
    that neither originates nor terminates in the area itself. This
    parameter is calculated when the area's shortest-path tree is
    built (see Section 16.1, where TransitCapability is set to TRUE
    if and only if there are one or more fully adjacent virtual
    links using the area as Transit area), and is used as an input
    to a subsequent step of the routing table build process (see
    Section 16.3). When an area's TransitCapability is set to TRUE,
    the area is said to be a "transit area".
ExternalRoutingCapability
    Whether AS-external-LSAs will be flooded into/throughout the
    area.  This is a configurable parameter.  If AS-external-LSAs
    are excluded from the area, the area is called a "stub". Within
    stub areas, routing to AS external destinations will be based
    solely on a default summary route.  The backbone cannot be
    configured as a stub area.  Also, virtual links cannot be
    configured through stub areas.  For more information, see
    Section 3.6.
StubDefaultCost
    If the area has been configured as a stub area, and the router
    itself is an area border router, then the StubDefaultCost
    indicates the cost of the default summary-LSA that the router
    should advertise into the area. See Section 12.4.3 for more
    information.
Unless otherwise specified, the remaining sections of this document
refer to the operation of the OSPF protocol within a single area.

Bringing Up Adjacencies

OSPF creates adjacencies between neighboring routers for the purpose
of exchanging routing information.  Not every two neighboring
routers will become adjacent.  This section covers the generalities
involved in creating adjacencies.  For further details consult
Section 10.
7.1.  The Hello Protocol
    The Hello Protocol is responsible for establishing and
    maintaining neighbor relationships.  It also ensures that
    communication between neighbors is bidirectional.  Hello packets
    are sent periodically out all router interfaces.  Bidirectional
    communication is indicated when the router sees itself listed in
    the neighbor's Hello Packet.  On broadcast and NBMA networks,
    the Hello Protocol elects a Designated Router for the network.
    The Hello Protocol works differently on broadcast networks, NBMA
    networks and Point-to-MultiPoint networks.  On broadcast
    networks, each router advertises itself by periodically
    multicasting Hello Packets.  This allows neighbors to be
    discovered dynamically.  These Hello Packets contain the
    router's view of the Designated Router's identity, and the list
    of routers whose Hello Packets have been seen recently.
    On NBMA networks some configuration information may be necessary
    for the operation of the Hello Protocol.  Each router that may
    potentially become Designated Router has a list of all other
    routers attached to the network.  A router, having Designated
    Router potential, sends Hello Packets to all other potential
    Designated Routers when its interface to the NBMA network first
    becomes operational.  This is an attempt to find the Designated
    Router for the network.  If the router itself is elected
    Designated Router, it begins sending Hello Packets to all other
    routers attached to the network.
    On Point-to-MultiPoint networks, a router sends Hello Packets to
    all neighbors with which it can communicate directly. These
    neighbors may be discovered dynamically through a protocol such
    as Inverse ARP (see [Ref14]), or they may be configured.
    After a neighbor has been discovered, bidirectional
    communication ensured, and (if on a broadcast or NBMA network) a
    Designated Router elected, a decision is made regarding whether
    or not an adjacency should be formed with the neighbor (see
    Section 10.4). If an adjacency is to be formed, the first step
    is to synchronize the neighbors' link-state databases.  This is
    covered in the next section.
7.2.  The Synchronization of Databases
    In a link-state routing algorithm, it is very important for all
    routers' link-state databases to stay synchronized.  OSPF
    simplifies this by requiring only adjacent routers to remain
    synchronized.  The synchronization process begins as soon as the
    routers attempt to bring up the adjacency.  Each router
    describes its database by sending a sequence of Database
    Description packets to its neighbor.  Each Database Description
    Packet describes a set of LSAs belonging to the router's
    database.  When the neighbor sees an LSA that is more recent
    than its own database copy, it makes a note that this newer LSA
    should be requested.
    This sending and receiving of Database Description packets is
    called the "Database Exchange Process".  During this process,
    the two routers form a master/slave relationship.  Each Database
    Description Packet has a sequence number.  Database Description
    Packets sent by the master (polls) are acknowledged by the slave
    through echoing of the sequence number.  Both polls and their
    responses contain summaries of link state data.  The master is
    the only one allowed to retransmit Database Description Packets.
    It does so only at fixed intervals, the length of which is the
    configured per-interface constant RxmtInterval.
    Each Database Description contains an indication that there are
    more packets to follow --- the M-bit.  The Database Exchange
    Process is over when a router has received and sent Database
    Description Packets with the M-bit off.
    During and after the Database Exchange Process, each router has
    a list of those LSAs for which the neighbor has more up-to-date
    instances.  These LSAs are requested in Link State Request
    Packets.  Link State Request packets that are not satisfied are
    retransmitted at fixed intervals of time RxmtInterval.  When the
    Database Description Process has completed and all Link State
    Requests have been satisfied, the databases are deemed
    synchronized and the routers are marked fully adjacent.  At this
    time the adjacency is fully functional and is advertised in the
    two routers' router-LSAs.
    The adjacency is used by the flooding procedure as soon as the
    Database Exchange Process begins.  This simplifies database
    synchronization, and guarantees that it finishes in a
    predictable period of time.
7.3.  The Designated Router
    Every broadcast and NBMA network has a Designated Router.  The
    Designated Router performs two main functions for the routing
    protocol:
    o   The Designated Router originates a network-LSA on behalf of
        the network.  This LSA lists the set of routers (including
        the Designated Router itself) currently attached to the
        network.  The Link State ID for this LSA (see Section
        12.1.4) is the IP interface address of the Designated
        Router.  The IP network number can then be obtained by using
        the network's subnet/network mask.
    o   The Designated Router becomes adjacent to all other routers
        on the network.  Since the link state databases are
        synchronized across adjacencies (through adjacency bring-up
        and then the flooding procedure), the Designated Router
        plays a central part in the synchronization process.
    The Designated Router is elected by the Hello Protocol.  A
    router's Hello Packet contains its Router Priority, which is
    configurable on a per-interface basis.  In general, when a
    router's interface to a network first becomes functional, it
    checks to see whether there is currently a Designated Router for
    the network.  If there is, it accepts that Designated Router,
    regardless of its Router Priority.  (This makes it harder to
    predict the identity of the Designated Router, but ensures that
    the Designated Router changes less often.  See below.)
    Otherwise, the router itself becomes Designated Router if it has
    the highest Router Priority on the network.  A more detailed
    (and more accurate) description of Designated Router election is
    presented in Section 9.4.
    The Designated Router is the endpoint of many adjacencies.  In
    order to optimize the flooding procedure on broadcast networks,
    the Designated Router multicasts its Link State Update Packets
    to the address AllSPFRouters, rather than sending separate
    packets over each adjacency.
    Section 2 of this document discusses the directed graph
    representation of an area.  Router nodes are labelled with their
    Router ID.  Transit network nodes are actually labelled with the
    IP address of their Designated Router.  It follows that when the
    Designated Router changes, it appears as if the network node on
    the graph is replaced by an entirely new node.  This will cause
    the network and all its attached routers to originate new LSAs.
    Until the link-state databases again converge, some temporary
    loss of connectivity may result.  This may result in ICMP
    unreachable messages being sent in response to data traffic.
    For that reason, the Designated Router should change only
    infrequently.  Router Priorities should be configured so that
    the most dependable router on a network eventually becomes
    Designated Router.
7.4.  The Backup Designated Router
    In order to make the transition to a new Designated Router
    smoother, there is a Backup Designated Router for each broadcast
    and NBMA network.  The Backup Designated Router is also adjacent
    to all routers on the network, and becomes Designated Router
    when the previous Designated Router fails.  If there were no
    Backup Designated Router, when a new Designated Router became
    necessary, new adjacencies would have to be formed between the
    new Designated Router and all other routers attached to the
    network.  Part of the adjacency forming process is the
    synchronizing of link-state databases, which can potentially
    take quite a long time.  During this time, the network would not
    be available for transit data traffic.  The Backup Designated
    obviates the need to form these adjacencies, since they already
    exist.  This means the period of disruption in transit traffic
    lasts only as long as it takes to flood the new LSAs (which
    announce the new Designated Router).
    The Backup Designated Router does not generate a network-LSA for
    the network.  (If it did, the transition to a new Designated
    Router would be even faster.  However, this is a tradeoff
    between database size and speed of convergence when the
    Designated Router disappears.)
    The Backup Designated Router is also elected by the Hello
    Protocol.  Each Hello Packet has a field that specifies the
    Backup Designated Router for the network.
    In some steps of the flooding procedure, the Backup Designated
    Router plays a passive role, letting the Designated Router do
    more of the work.  This cuts down on the amount of local routing
    traffic.  See Section 13.3 for more information.
7.5.  The graph of adjacencies
    An adjacency is bound to the network that the two routers have
    in common.  If two routers have multiple networks in common,
    they may have multiple adjacencies between them.
    One can picture the collection of adjacencies on a network as
    forming an undirected graph.  The vertices consist of routers,
    with an edge joining two routers if they are adjacent.  The
    graph of adjacencies describes the flow of routing protocol
    packets, and in particular Link State Update Packets, through
    the Autonomous System.
    Two graphs are possible, depending on whether a Designated
    Router is elected for the network.  On physical point-to-point
    networks, Point-to-MultiPoint networks and virtual links,
    neighboring routers become adjacent whenever they can
    communicate directly.  In contrast, on broadcast and NBMA
    networks only the Designated Router and the Backup Designated
    Router become adjacent to all other routers attached to the
    network.
      +---+            +---+
      |RT1|------------|RT2|            o---------------o
      +---+    N1      +---+           RT1             RT2
                                             RT7
                                              o---------+
        +---+   +---+   +---+                /|\        |
        |RT7|   |RT3|   |RT4|               / | \       |
        +---+   +---+   +---+              /  |  \      |
          |       |       |               /   |   \     |
     +-----------------------+        RT5o RT6o    oRT4 |
              |       |     N2            *   *   *     |
            +---+   +---+                  *  *  *      |
            |RT5|   |RT6|                   * * *       |
            +---+   +---+                    ***        |
                                              o---------+
                                             RT3
              Figure 10: The graph of adjacencies
    These graphs are shown in Figure 10.  It is assumed that Router
    RT7 has become the Designated Router, and Router RT3 the Backup
    Designated Router, for the Network N2.  The Backup Designated
    Router performs a lesser function during the flooding procedure
    than the Designated Router (see Section 13.3).  This is the
    reason for the dashed lines connecting the Backup Designated
    Router RT3.

Protocol Packet Processing

This section discusses the general processing of OSPF routing
protocol packets.  It is very important that the router link-state
databases remain synchronized.  For this reason, routing protocol
packets should get preferential treatment over ordinary data
packets, both in sending and receiving.
Routing protocol packets are sent along adjacencies only (with the
exception of Hello packets, which are used to discover the
adjacencies).  This means that all routing protocol packets travel a
single IP hop, except those sent over virtual links.
All routing protocol packets begin with a standard header.  The
sections below provide details on how to fill in and verify this
standard header.  Then, for each packet type, the section giving
more details on that particular packet type's processing is listed.
8.1.  Sending protocol packets
    When a router sends a routing protocol packet, it fills in the
    fields of the standard OSPF packet header as follows.  For more
    details on the header format consult Section A.3.1:
    Version #
        Set to 2, the version number of the protocol as documented
        in this specification.
    Packet type
        The type of OSPF packet, such as Link state Update or Hello
        Packet.
    Packet length
        The length of the entire OSPF packet in bytes, including the
        standard OSPF packet header.
    Router ID
        The identity of the router itself (who is originating the
        packet).
    Area ID
        The OSPF area that the packet is being sent into.
    Checksum
        The standard IP 16-bit one's complement checksum of the
        entire OSPF packet, excluding the 64-bit authentication
        field.  This checksum is calculated as part of the
        appropriate authentication procedure; for some OSPF
        authentication types, the checksum calculation is omitted.
        See Section D.4 for details.
    AuType and Authentication
        Each OSPF packet exchange is authenticated.  Authentication
        types are assigned by the protocol and are documented in
        Appendix D.  A different authentication procedure can be
        used for each IP network/subnet.  Autype indicates the type
        of authentication procedure in use. The 64-bit
        authentication field is then for use by the chosen
        authentication procedure.  This procedure should be the last
        called when forming the packet to be sent. See Section D.4
        for details.
    The IP destination address for the packet is selected as
    follows.  On physical point-to-point networks, the IP
    destination is always set to the address AllSPFRouters.  On all
    other network types (including virtual links), the majority of
    OSPF packets are sent as unicasts, i.e., sent directly to the
    other end of the adjacency.  In this case, the IP destination is
    just the Neighbor IP address associated with the other end of
    the adjacency (see Section 10).  The only packets not sent as
    unicasts are on broadcast networks; on these networks Hello
    packets are sent to the multicast destination AllSPFRouters, the
    Designated Router and its Backup send both Link State Update
    Packets and Link State Acknowledgment Packets to the multicast
    address AllSPFRouters, while all other routers send both their
    Link State Update and Link State Acknowledgment Packets to the
    multicast address AllDRouters.
    Retransmissions of Link State Update packets are ALWAYS sent
    directly to the neighbor. On multi-access networks, this means
    that retransmissions should be sent to the neighbor's IP
    address.
    The IP source address should be set to the IP address of the
    sending interface.  Interfaces to unnumbered point-to-point
    networks have no associated IP address.  On these interfaces,
    the IP source should be set to any of the other IP addresses
    belonging to the router.  For this reason, there must be at
    least one IP address assigned to the router.[2] Note that, for
    most purposes, virtual links act precisely the same as
    unnumbered point-to-point networks.  However, each virtual link
    does have an IP interface address (discovered during the routing
    table build process) which is used as the IP source when sending
    packets over the virtual link.
    For more information on the format of specific OSPF packet
    types, consult the sections listed in Table 10.
         Type   Packet name            detailed section (transmit)
         _________________________________________________________
         1      Hello                  Section  9.5
         2      Database description   Section 10.8
         3      Link state request     Section 10.9
         4      Link state update      Section 13.3
         5      Link state ack         Section 13.5
  Table 10: Sections describing OSPF protocol packet transmission.
8.2.  Receiving protocol packets
    Whenever a protocol packet is received by the router it is
    marked with the interface it was received on.  For routers that
    have virtual links configured, it may not be immediately obvious
    which interface to associate the packet with.  For example,
    consider the Router RT11 depicted in Figure 6.  If RT11 receives
    an OSPF protocol packet on its interface to Network N8, it may
    want to associate the packet with the interface to Area 2, or
    with the virtual link to Router RT10 (which is part of the
    backbone).  In the following, we assume that the packet is
    initially associated with the non-virtual  link.[3]
    In order for the packet to be accepted at the IP level, it must
    pass a number of tests, even before the packet is passed to OSPF
    for processing:
    o   The IP checksum must be correct.
    o   The packet's IP destination address must be the IP address
        of the receiving interface, or one of the IP multicast
        addresses AllSPFRouters or AllDRouters.
    o   The IP protocol specified must be OSPF (89).
    o   Locally originated packets should not be passed on to OSPF.
        That is, the source IP address should be examined to make
        sure this is not a multicast packet that the router itself
        generated.
    Next, the OSPF packet header is verified.  The fields specified
    in the header must match those configured for the receiving
    interface.  If they do not, the packet should be discarded:
    o   The version number field must specify protocol version 2.
    o   The Area ID found in the OSPF header must be verified.  If
        both of the following cases fail, the packet should be
        discarded.  The Area ID specified in the header must either:
        (1) Match the Area ID of the receiving interface.  In this
            case, the packet has been sent over a single hop.
            Therefore, the packet's IP source address is required to
            be on the same network as the receiving interface.  This
            can be verified by comparing the packet's IP source
            address to the interface's IP address, after masking
            both addresses with the interface mask.  This comparison
            should not be performed on point-to-point networks. On
            point-to-point networks, the interface addresses of each
            end of the link are assigned independently, if they are
            assigned at all.
        (2) Indicate the backbone.  In this case, the packet has
            been sent over a virtual link.  The receiving router
            must be an area border router, and the Router ID
            specified in the packet (the source router) must be the
            other end of a configured virtual link.  The receiving
            interface must also attach to the virtual link's
            configured Transit area.  If all of these checks
            succeed, the packet is accepted and is from now on
            associated with the virtual link (and the backbone
            area).
    o   Packets whose IP destination is AllDRouters should only be
        accepted if the state of the receiving interface is DR or
        Backup (see Section 9.1).
    o   The AuType specified in the packet must match the AuType
        specified for the associated area.
    o   The packet must be authenticated.  The authentication
        procedure is indicated by the setting of AuType (see
        Appendix D).  The authentication procedure may use one or
        more Authentication keys, which can be configured on a per-
        interface basis.  The authentication procedure may also
        verify the checksum field in the OSPF packet header (which,
        when used, is set to the standard IP 16-bit one's complement
        checksum of the OSPF packet's contents after excluding the
        64-bit authentication field).  If the authentication
        procedure fails, the packet should be discarded.
    If the packet type is Hello, it should then be further processed
    by the Hello Protocol (see Section 10.5).  All other packet
    types are sent/received only on adjacencies.  This means that
    the packet must have been sent by one of the router's active
    neighbors.  If the receiving interface connects to a broadcast
    network, Point-to-MultiPoint network or NBMA network the sender
    is identified by the IP source address found in the packet's IP
    header.  If the receiving interface connects to a point-to-point
    network or a virtual link, the sender is identified by the
    Router ID (source router) found in the packet's OSPF header.
    The data structure associated with the receiving interface
    contains the list of active neighbors.  Packets not matching any
    active neighbor are discarded.
    At this point all received protocol packets are associated with
    an active neighbor.  For the further input processing of
    specific packet types, consult the sections listed in Table 11.
          Type   Packet name            detailed section (receive)
          ________________________________________________________
          1      Hello                  Section 10.5
          2      Database description   Section 10.6
          3      Link state request     Section 10.7
          4      Link state update      Section 13
          5      Link state ack         Section 13.7
  Table 11: Sections describing OSPF protocol packet reception.

The Interface Data Structure

An OSPF interface is the connection between a router and a network.
We assume a single OSPF interface to each attached network/subnet,
although supporting multiple interfaces on a single network is
considered in Appendix F. Each interface structure has at most one
IP interface address.
An OSPF interface can be considered to belong to the area that
contains the attached network.  All routing protocol packets
originated by the router over this interface are labelled with the
interface's Area ID.  One or more router adjacencies may develop
over an interface.  A router's LSAs reflect the state of its
interfaces and their associated adjacencies.
The following data items are associated with an interface.  Note
that a number of these items are actually configuration for the
attached network; such items must be the same for all routers
connected to the network.
Type
    The OSPF interface type is either point-to-point, broadcast,
    NBMA, Point-to-MultiPoint or virtual link.
State
    The functional level of an interface.  State determines whether
    or not full adjacencies are allowed to form over the interface.
    State is also reflected in the router's LSAs.
IP interface address
    The IP address associated with the interface.  This appears as
    the IP source address in all routing protocol packets originated
    over this interface.  Interfaces to unnumbered point-to-point
    networks do not have an associated IP address.
IP interface mask
    Also referred to as the subnet mask, this indicates the portion
    of the IP interface address that identifies the attached
    network.  Masking the IP interface address with the IP interface
    mask yields the IP network number of the attached network.  On
    point-to-point networks and virtual links, the IP interface mask
    is not defined. On these networks, the link itself is not
    assigned an IP network number, and so the addresses of each side
    of the link are assigned independently, if they are assigned at
    all.
Area ID
    The Area ID of the area to which the attached network belongs.
    All routing protocol packets originating from the interface are
    labelled with this Area ID.
HelloInterval
    The length of time, in seconds, between the Hello packets that
    the router sends on the interface.  Advertised in Hello packets
    sent out this interface.
RouterDeadInterval
    The number of seconds before the router's neighbors will declare
    it down, when they stop hearing the router's Hello Packets.
    Advertised in Hello packets sent out this interface.
InfTransDelay
    The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link
    State Update Packet over this interface.  LSAs contained in the
    Link State Update packet will have their age incremented by this
    amount before transmission.  This value should take into account
    transmission and propagation delays; it must be greater than
    zero.
Router Priority
    An 8-bit unsigned integer.  When two routers attached to a
    network both attempt to become Designated Router, the one with
    the highest Router Priority takes precedence.  A router whose
    Router Priority is set to 0 is ineligible to become Designated
    Router on the attached network.  Advertised in Hello packets
    sent out this interface.
Hello Timer
    An interval timer that causes the interface to send a Hello
    packet.  This timer fires every HelloInterval seconds.  Note
    that on non-broadcast networks a separate Hello packet is sent
    to each qualified neighbor.
Wait Timer
    A single shot timer that causes the interface to exit the
    Waiting state, and as a consequence select a Designated Router
    on the network.  The length of the timer is RouterDeadInterval
    seconds.
List of neighboring routers
    The other routers attached to this network.  This list is formed
    by the Hello Protocol.  Adjacencies will be formed to some of
    these neighbors.  The set of adjacent neighbors can be
    determined by an examination of all of the neighbors' states.
Designated Router
    The Designated Router selected for the attached network.  The
    Designated Router is selected on all broadcast and NBMA networks
    by the Hello Protocol.  Two pieces of identification are kept
    for the Designated Router: its Router ID and its IP interface
    address on the network.  The Designated Router advertises link
    state for the network; this network-LSA is labelled with the
    Designated Router's IP address.  The Designated Router is
    initialized to 0.0.0.0, which indicates the lack of a Designated
    Router.
Backup Designated Router
    The Backup Designated Router is also selected on all broadcast
    and NBMA networks by the Hello Protocol.  All routers on the
    attached network become adjacent to both the Designated Router
    and the Backup Designated Router.  The Backup Designated Router
    becomes Designated Router when the current Designated Router
    fails.  The Backup Designated Router is initialized to 0.0.0.0,
    indicating the lack of a Backup Designated Router.
Interface output cost(s)
    The cost of sending a data packet on the interface, expressed in
    the link state metric.  This is advertised as the link cost for
    this interface in the router-LSA. The cost of an interface must
    be greater than zero.
RxmtInterval
    The number of seconds between LSA retransmissions, for
    adjacencies belonging to this interface.  Also used when
    retransmitting Database Description and Link State Request
    Packets.
AuType
    The type of authentication used on the attached network/subnet.
    Authentication types are defined in Appendix D.  All OSPF packet
    exchanges are authenticated.  Different authentication schemes
    may be used on different networks/subnets.
Authentication key
    This configured data allows the authentication procedure to
    generate and/or verify OSPF protocol packets.  The
    Authentication key can be configured on a per-interface basis.
    For example, if the AuType indicates simple password, the
    Authentication key would be a 64-bit clear password which is
    inserted into the OSPF packet header. If instead Autype
    indicates Cryptographic authentication, then the Authentication
    key is a shared secret which enables the generation/verification
    of message digests which are appended to the OSPF protocol
    packets. When Cryptographic authentication is used, multiple
    simultaneous keys are supported in order to achieve smooth key
    transition (see Section D.3).
9.1.  Interface states
    The various states that router interfaces may attain is
    documented in this section.  The states are listed in order of
    progressing functionality.  For example, the inoperative state
    is listed first, followed by a list of intermediate states
    before the final, fully functional state is achieved.  The
    specification makes use of this ordering by sometimes making
    references such as "those interfaces in state greater than X".
    Figure 11 shows the graph of interface state changes.  The arcs
    of the graph are labelled with the event causing the state
    change.  These events are documented in Section 9.2.  The
    interface state machine is described in more detail in Section
    9.3.
    Down
        This is the initial interface state.  In this state, the
        lower-level protocols have indicated that the interface is
        unusable.  No protocol traffic at all will be sent or
        received on such a interface.  In this state, interface
        parameters should be set to their initial values.  All
        interface timers should be disabled, and there should be no
        adjacencies associated with the interface.
    Loopback
        In this state, the router's interface to the network is
                              +----+   UnloopInd   +--------+
                              |Down|<--------------|Loopback|
                              +----+               +--------+
                                 |
                                 |InterfaceUp
                      +-------+  |               +--------------+
                      |Waiting|<-+-------------->|Point-to-point|
                      +-------+                  +--------------+
                          |
                 WaitTimer|BackupSeen
                          |
                          |
                          |   NeighborChange
      +------+           +-+<---------------- +-------+
      |Backup|<----------|?|----------------->|DROther|
      +------+---------->+-+<-----+           +-------+
                Neighbor  |       |
                Change    |       |Neighbor
                          |       |Change
                          |     +--+
                          +---->|DR|
                                +--+
                  Figure 11: Interface State changes
             In addition to the state transitions pictured,
             Event InterfaceDown always forces Down State, and
             Event LoopInd always forces Loopback State
        looped back.  The interface may be looped back in hardware
        or software.  The interface will be unavailable for regular
        data traffic.  However, it may still be desirable to gain
        information on the quality of this interface, either through
        sending ICMP pings to the interface or through something
        like a bit error test.  For this reason, IP packets may
        still be addressed to an interface in Loopback state.  To
        facilitate this, such interfaces are advertised in router-
        LSAs as single host routes, whose destination is the IP
        interface address.[4]
    Waiting
        In this state, the router is trying to determine the
        identity of the (Backup) Designated Router for the network.
        To do this, the router monitors the Hello Packets it
        receives.  The router is not allowed to elect a Backup
        Designated Router nor a Designated Router until it
        transitions out of Waiting state.  This prevents unnecessary
        changes of (Backup) Designated Router.
    Point-to-point
        In this state, the interface is operational, and connects
        either to a physical point-to-point network or to a virtual
        link.  Upon entering this state, the router attempts to form
        an adjacency with the neighboring router.  Hello Packets are
        sent to the neighbor every HelloInterval seconds.
    DR Other
        The interface is to a broadcast or NBMA network on which
        another router has been selected to be the Designated
        Router.  In this state, the router itself has not been
        selected Backup Designated Router either.  The router forms
        adjacencies to both the Designated Router and the Backup
        Designated Router (if they exist).
    Backup
        In this state, the router itself is the Backup Designated
        Router on the attached network.  It will be promoted to
        Designated Router when the present Designated Router fails.
        The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers
        attached to the network.  The Backup Designated Router
        performs slightly different functions during the Flooding
        Procedure, as compared to the Designated Router (see Section
        13.3).  See Section 7.4 for more details on the functions
        performed by the Backup Designated Router.
    DR  In this state, this router itself is the Designated Router
        on the attached network.  Adjacencies are established to all
        other routers attached to the network.  The router must also
        originate a network-LSA for the network node.  The network-
        LSA will contain links to all routers (including the
        Designated Router itself) attached to the network.  See
        Section 7.3 for more details on the functions performed by
        the Designated Router.
9.2.  Events causing interface state changes
    State changes can be effected by a number of events.  These
    events are pictured as the labelled arcs in Figure 11.  The
    label definitions are listed below.  For a detailed explanation
    of the effect of these events on OSPF protocol operation,
    consult Section 9.3.
    InterfaceUp
        Lower-level protocols have indicated that the network
        interface is operational.  This enables the interface to
        transition out of Down state.  On virtual links, the
        interface operational indication is actually a result of the
        shortest path calculation (see Section 16.7).
    WaitTimer
        The Wait Timer has fired, indicating the end of the waiting
        period that is required before electing a (Backup)
        Designated Router.
    BackupSeen
        The router has detected the existence or non-existence of a
        Backup Designated Router for the network.  This is done in
        one of two ways.  First, an Hello Packet may be received
        from a neighbor claiming to be itself the Backup Designated
        Router.  Alternatively, an Hello Packet may be received from
        a neighbor claiming to be itself the Designated Router, and
        indicating that there is no Backup Designated Router.  In
        either case there must be bidirectional communication with
        the neighbor, i.e., the router must also appear in the
        neighbor's Hello Packet.  This event signals an end to the
        Waiting state.
    NeighborChange
        There has been a change in the set of bidirectional
        neighbors associated with the interface.  The (Backup)
        Designated Router needs to be recalculated.  The following
        neighbor changes lead to the NeighborChange event.  For an
        explanation of neighbor states, see Section 10.1.
        o   Bidirectional communication has been established to a
            neighbor.  In other words, the state of the neighbor has
            transitioned to 2-Way or higher.
        o   There is no longer bidirectional communication with a
            neighbor.  In other words, the state of the neighbor has
            transitioned to Init or lower.
        o   One of the bidirectional neighbors is newly declaring
            itself as either Designated Router or Backup Designated
            Router.  This is detected through examination of that
            neighbor's Hello Packets.
        o   One of the bidirectional neighbors is no longer
            declaring itself as Designated Router, or is no longer
            declaring itself as Backup Designated Router.  This is
            again detected through examination of that neighbor's
            Hello Packets.
        o   The advertised Router Priority for a bidirectional
            neighbor has changed.  This is again detected through
            examination of that neighbor's Hello Packets.
    LoopInd
        An indication has been received that the interface is now
        looped back to itself.  This indication can be received
        either from network management or from the lower level
        protocols.
    UnloopInd
        An indication has been received that the interface is no
        longer looped back.  As with the LoopInd event, this
        indication can be received either from network management or
        from the lower level protocols.
    InterfaceDown
        Lower-level protocols indicate that this interface is no
        longer functional.  No matter what the current interface
        state is, the new interface state will be Down.
9.3.  The Interface state machine
    A detailed description of the interface state changes follows.
    Each state change is invoked by an event (Section 9.2).  This
    event may produce different effects, depending on the current
    state of the interface.  For this reason, the state machine
    below is organized by current interface state and received
    event.  Each entry in the state machine describes the resulting
    new interface state and the required set of additional actions.
    When an interface's state changes, it may be necessary to
    originate a new router-LSA.  See Section 12.4 for more details.
    Some of the required actions below involve generating events for
    the neighbor state machine.  For example, when an interface
    becomes inoperative, all neighbor connections associated with
    the interface must be destroyed.  For more information on the
    neighbor state machine, see Section 10.3.
     State(s):  Down
        Event:  InterfaceUp
    New state:  Depends upon action routine
       Action:  Start the interval Hello Timer, enabling the
                periodic sending of Hello packets out the interface.
                If the attached network is a physical point-to-point
                network, Point-to-MultiPoint network or virtual
                link, the interface state transitions to Point-to-
                Point.  Else, if the router is not eligible to
                become Designated Router the interface state
                transitions to DR Other.
                Otherwise, the attached network is a broadcast or
                NBMA network and the router is eligible to become
                Designated Router.  In this case, in an attempt to
                discover the attached network's Designated Router
                the interface state is set to Waiting and the single
                shot Wait Timer is started.  Additionally, if the
                network is an NBMA network examine the configured
                list of neighbors for this interface and generate
                the neighbor event Start for each neighbor that is
                also eligible to become Designated Router.
     State(s):  Waiting
        Event:  BackupSeen
    New state:  Depends upon action routine.
       Action:  Calculate the attached network's Backup Designated
                Router and Designated Router, as shown in Section
                9.4.  As a result of this calculation, the new state
                of the interface will be either DR Other, Backup or
                DR.
     State(s):  Waiting
        Event:  WaitTimer
    New state:  Depends upon action routine.
       Action:  Calculate the attached network's Backup Designated
                Router and Designated Router, as shown in Section
                9.4.  As a result of this calculation, the new state
                of the interface will be either DR Other, Backup or
                DR.
     State(s):  DR Other, Backup or DR
        Event:  NeighborChange
    New state:  Depends upon action routine.
       Action:  Recalculate the attached network's Backup Designated
                Router and Designated Router, as shown in Section
                9.4.  As a result of this calculation, the new state
                of the interface will be either DR Other, Backup or
                DR.
     State(s):  Any State
        Event:  InterfaceDown
    New state:  Down
       Action:  All interface variables are reset, and interface
                timers disabled.  Also, all neighbor connections
                associated with the interface are destroyed.  This
                is done by generating the event KillNbr on all
                associated neighbors (see Section 10.2).
     State(s):  Any State
        Event:  LoopInd
    New state:  Loopback
       Action:  Since this interface is no longer connected to the
                attached network the actions associated with the
                above InterfaceDown event are executed.
     State(s):  Loopback
        Event:  UnloopInd
    New state:  Down
       Action:  No actions are necessary.  For example, the
                interface variables have already been reset upon
                entering the Loopback state.  Note that reception of
                an InterfaceUp event is necessary before the
                interface again becomes fully functional.
9.4.  Electing the Designated Router
    This section describes the algorithm used for calculating a
    network's Designated Router and Backup Designated Router.  This
    algorithm is invoked by the Interface state machine.  The
    initial time a router runs the election algorithm for a network,
    the network's Designated Router and Backup Designated Router are
    initialized to 0.0.0.0.  This indicates the lack of both a
    Designated Router and a Backup Designated Router.
    The Designated Router election algorithm proceeds as follows:
    Call the router doing the calculation Router X.  The list of
    neighbors attached to the network and having established
    bidirectional communication with Router X is examined.  This
    list is precisely the collection of Router X's neighbors (on
    this network) whose state is greater than or equal to 2-Way (see
    Section 10.1).  Router X itself is also considered to be on the
    list.  Discard all routers from the list that are ineligible to
    become Designated Router.  (Routers having Router Priority of 0
    are ineligible to become Designated Router.)  The following
    steps are then executed, considering only those routers that
    remain on the list:
    (1) Note the current values for the network's Designated Router
        and Backup Designated Router.  This is used later for
        comparison purposes.
    (2) Calculate the new Backup Designated Router for the network
        as follows.  Only those routers on the list that have not
        declared themselves to be Designated Router are eligible to
        become Backup Designated Router.  If one or more of these
        routers have declared themselves Backup Designated Router
        (i.e., they are currently listing themselves as Backup
        Designated Router, but not as Designated Router, in their
        Hello Packets) the one having highest Router Priority is
        declared to be Backup Designated Router.  In case of a tie,
        the one having the highest Router ID is chosen.  If no
        routers have declared themselves Backup Designated Router,
        choose the router having highest Router Priority, (again
        excluding those routers who have declared themselves
        Designated Router), and again use the Router ID to break
        ties.
    (3) Calculate the new Designated Router for the network as
        follows.  If one or more of the routers have declared
        themselves Designated Router (i.e., they are currently
        listing themselves as Designated Router in their Hello
        Packets) the one having highest Router Priority is declared
        to be Designated Router.  In case of a tie, the one having
        the highest Router ID is chosen.  If no routers have
        declared themselves Designated Router, assign the Designated
        Router to be the same as the newly elected Backup Designated
        Router.
    (4) If Router X is now newly the Designated Router or newly the
        Backup Designated Router, or is now no longer the Designated
        Router or no longer the Backup Designated Router, repeat
        steps 2 and 3, and then proceed to step 5.  For example, if
        Router X is now the Designated Router, when step 2 is
        repeated X will no longer be eligible for Backup Designated
        Router election.  Among other things, this will ensure that
        no router will declare itself both Backup Designated Router
        and Designated Router.[5]
    (5) As a result of these calculations, the router itself may now
        be Designated Router or Backup Designated Router.  See
        Sections 7.3 and 7.4 for the additional duties this would
        entail.  The router's interface state should be set
        accordingly.  If the router itself is now Designated Router,
        the new interface state is DR.  If the router itself is now
        Backup Designated Router, the new interface state is Backup.
        Otherwise, the new interface state is DR Other.
    (6) If the attached network is an NBMA network, and the router
        itself has just become either Designated Router or Backup
        Designated Router, it must start sending Hello Packets to
        those neighbors that are not eligible to become Designated
        Router (see Section 9.5.1).  This is done by invoking the
        neighbor event Start for each neighbor having a Router
        Priority of 0.
    (7) If the above calculations have caused the identity of either
        the Designated Router or Backup Designated Router to change,
        the set of adjacencies associated with this interface will
        need to be modified.  Some adjacencies may need to be
        formed, and others may need to be broken.  To accomplish
        this, invoke the event AdjOK?  on all neighbors whose state
        is at least 2-Way.  This will cause their eligibility for
        adjacency to be reexamined (see Sections 10.3 and 10.4).
    The reason behind the election algorithm's complexity is the
    desire for an orderly transition from Backup Designated Router
    to Designated Router, when the current Designated Router fails.
    This orderly transition is ensured through the introduction of
    hysteresis: no new Backup Designated Router can be chosen until
    the old Backup accepts its new Designated Router
    responsibilities.
    The above procedure may elect the same router to be both
    Designated Router and Backup Designated Router, although that
    router will never be the calculating router (Router X) itself.
    The elected Designated Router may not be the router having the
    highest Router Priority, nor will the Backup Designated Router
    necessarily have the second highest Router Priority.  If Router
    X is not itself eligible to become Designated Router, it is
    possible that neither a Backup Designated Router nor a
    Designated Router will be selected in the above procedure.  Note
    also that if Router X is the only attached router that is
    eligible to become Designated Router, it will select itself as
    Designated Router and there will be no Backup Designated Router
    for the network.
9.5.  Sending Hello packets
    Hello packets are sent out each functioning router interface.
    They are used to discover and maintain neighbor
    relationships.[6] On broadcast and NBMA networks, Hello Packets
    are also used to elect the Designated Router and Backup
    Designated Router.
    The format of an Hello packet is detailed in Section A.3.2.  The
    Hello Packet contains the router's Router Priority (used in
    choosing the Designated Router), and the interval between Hello
    Packets sent out the interface (HelloInterval).  The Hello
    Packet also indicates how often a neighbor must be heard from to
    remain active (RouterDeadInterval).  Both HelloInterval and
    RouterDeadInterval must be the same for all routers attached to
    a common network.  The Hello packet also contains the IP address
    mask of the attached network (Network Mask).  On unnumbered
    point-to-point networks and on virtual links this field should
    be set to 0.0.0.0.
    The Hello packet's Options field describes the router's optional
    OSPF capabilities.  One optional capability is defined in this
    specification (see Sections 4.5 and A.2).  The E-bit of the
    Options field should be set if and only if the attached area is
    capable of processing AS-external-LSAs (i.e., it is not a stub
    area).  If the E-bit is set incorrectly the neighboring routers
    will refuse to accept the Hello Packet (see Section 10.5).
    Unrecognized bits in the Hello Packet's Options field should be
    set to zero.
    In order to ensure two-way communication between adjacent
    routers, the Hello packet contains the list of all routers on
    the network from which Hello Packets have been seen recently.
    The Hello packet also contains the router's current choice for
    Designated Router and Backup Designated Router.  A value of
    0.0.0.0 in these fields means that one has not yet been
    selected.
    On broadcast networks and physical point-to-point networks,
    Hello packets are sent every HelloInterval seconds to the IP
    multicast address AllSPFRouters.  On virtual links, Hello
    packets are sent as unicasts (addressed directly to the other
    end of the virtual link) every HelloInterval seconds. On Point-
    to-MultiPoint networks, separate Hello packets are sent to each
    attached neighbor every HelloInterval seconds. Sending of Hello
    packets on NBMA networks is covered in the next section.
    9.5.1.  Sending Hello packets on NBMA networks
        Static configuration information may be necessary in order
        for the Hello Protocol to function on non-broadcast networks
        (see Sections C.5 and C.6).  On NBMA networks, every
        attached router which is eligible to become Designated
        Router becomes aware of all of its neighbors on the network
        (either through configuration or by some unspecified
        mechanism).  Each neighbor is labelled with the neighbor's
        Designated Router eligibility.
        The interface state must be at least Waiting for any Hello
        Packets to be sent out the NBMA interface.  Hello Packets
        are then sent directly (as unicasts) to some subset of a
        router's neighbors.  Sometimes an Hello Packet is sent
        periodically on a timer; at other times it is sent as a
        response to a received Hello Packet.  A router's hello-
        sending behavior varies depending on whether the router
        itself is eligible to become Designated Router.
        If the router is eligible to become Designated Router, it
        must periodically send Hello Packets to all neighbors that
        are also eligible.  In addition, if the router is itself the
        Designated Router or Backup Designated Router, it must also
        send periodic Hello Packets to all other neighbors.  This
        means that any two eligible routers are always exchanging
        Hello Packets, which is necessary for the correct operation
        of the Designated Router election algorithm.  To minimize
        the number of Hello Packets sent, the number of eligible
        routers on an NBMA network should be kept small.
        If the router is not eligible to become Designated Router,
        it must periodically send Hello Packets to both the
        Designated Router and the Backup Designated Router (if they
        exist).  It must also send an Hello Packet in reply to an
        Hello Packet received from any eligible neighbor (other than
        the current Designated Router and Backup Designated Router).
        This is needed to establish an initial bidirectional
        relationship with any potential Designated Router.
        When sending Hello packets periodically to any neighbor, the
        interval between Hello Packets is determined by the
        neighbor's state.  If the neighbor is in state Down, Hello
        Packets are sent every PollInterval seconds.  Otherwise,
        Hello Packets are sent every HelloInterval seconds.

10. The Neighbor Data Structure

An OSPF router converses with its neighboring routers.  Each
separate conversation is described by a "neighbor data structure".
Each conversation is bound to a particular OSPF router interface,
and is identified either by the neighboring router's OSPF Router ID
or by its Neighbor IP address (see below).  Thus if the OSPF router
and another router have multiple attached networks in common,
multiple conversations ensue, each described by a unique neighbor
data structure.  Each separate conversation is loosely referred to
in the text as being a separate "neighbor".
The neighbor data structure contains all information pertinent to
the forming or formed adjacency between the two neighbors.
(However, remember that not all neighbors become adjacent.)  An
adjacency can be viewed as a highly developed conversation between
two routers.
State
    The functional level of the neighbor conversation.  This is
    described in more detail in Section 10.1.
Inactivity Timer
    A single shot timer whose firing indicates that no Hello Packet
    has been seen from this neighbor recently.  The length of the
    timer is RouterDeadInterval seconds.
Master/Slave
    When the two neighbors are exchanging databases, they form a
    master/slave relationship.  The master sends the first Database
    Description Packet, and is the only part that is allowed to
    retransmit.  The slave can only respond to the master's Database
    Description Packets.  The master/slave relationship is
    negotiated in state ExStart.
DD Sequence Number
    The DD Sequence number of the Database Description packet that
    is currently being sent to the neighbor.
Last received Database Description packet
    The initialize(I), more (M) and master(MS) bits, Options field,
    and DD sequence number contained in the last Database
    Description packet received from the neighbor. Used to determine
    whether the next Database Description packet received from the
    neighbor is a duplicate.
Neighbor ID
    The OSPF Router ID of the neighboring router.  The Neighbor ID
    is learned when Hello packets are received from the neighbor, or
    is configured if this is a virtual adjacency (see Section C.4).
Neighbor Priority
    The Router Priority of the neighboring router.  Contained in the
    neighbor's Hello packets, this item is used when selecting the
    Designated Router for the attached network.
Neighbor IP address
    The IP address of the neighboring router's interface to the
    attached network.  Used as the Destination IP address when
    protocol packets are sent as unicasts along this adjacency.
    Also used in router-LSAs as the Link ID for the attached network
    if the neighboring router is selected to be Designated Router
    (see Section 12.4.1).  The Neighbor IP address is learned when
    Hello packets are received from the neighbor.  For virtual
    links, the Neighbor IP address is learned during the routing
    table build process (see Section 15).
Neighbor Options
    The optional OSPF capabilities supported by the neighbor.
    Learned during the Database Exchange process (see Section 10.6).
    The neighbor's optional OSPF capabilities are also listed in its
    Hello packets.  This enables received Hello Packets to be
    rejected (i.e., neighbor relationships will not even start to
    form) if there is a mismatch in certain crucial OSPF
    capabilities (see Section 10.5).  The optional OSPF capabilities
    are documented in Section 4.5.
Neighbor's Designated Router
    The neighbor's idea of the Designated Router.  If this is the
    neighbor itself, this is important in the local calculation of
    the Designated Router.  Defined only on broadcast and NBMA
    networks.
Neighbor's Backup Designated Router
    The neighbor's idea of the Backup Designated Router.  If this is
    the neighbor itself, this is important in the local calculation
    of the Backup Designated Router.  Defined only on broadcast and
    NBMA networks.
The next set of variables are lists of LSAs.  These lists describe
subsets of the area link-state database.  This memo defines five
distinct types of LSAs, all of which may be present in an area
link-state database: router-LSAs, network-LSAs, and Type 3 and 4
summary-LSAs (all stored in the area data structure), and AS-
external-LSAs (stored in the global data structure).
Link state retransmission list
    The list of LSAs that have been flooded but not acknowledged on
    this adjacency.  These will be retransmitted at intervals until
    they are acknowledged, or until the adjacency is destroyed.
Database summary list
    The complete list of LSAs that make up the area link-state
    database, at the moment the neighbor goes into Database Exchange
    state.  This list is sent to the neighbor in Database
    Description packets.
Link state request list
    The list of LSAs that need to be received from this neighbor in
    order to synchronize the two neighbors' link-state databases.
    This list is created as Database Description packets are
    received, and is then sent to the neighbor in Link State Request
    packets.  The list is depleted as appropriate Link State Update
    packets are received.
10.1.  Neighbor states
    The state of a neighbor (really, the state of a conversation
    being held with a neighboring router) is documented in the
    following sections.  The states are listed in order of
    progressing functionality.  For example, the inoperative state
    is listed first, followed by a list of intermediate states
    before the final, fully functional state is achieved.  The
    specification makes use of this ordering by sometimes making
    references such as "those neighbors/adjacencies in state greater
    than X".  Figures 12 and 13 show the graph of neighbor state
    changes.  The arcs of the graphs are labelled with the event
    causing the state change.  The neighbor events are documented in
    Section 10.2.
    The graph in Figure 12 shows the state changes effected by the
    Hello Protocol.  The Hello Protocol is responsible for neighbor
    acquisition and maintenance, and for ensuring two way
    communication between neighbors.
    The graph in Figure 13 shows the forming of an adjacency.  Not
    every two neighboring routers become adjacent (see Section
    10.4).  The adjacency starts to form when the neighbor is in
    state ExStart.  After the two routers discover their
    master/slave status, the state transitions to Exchange.  At this
    point the neighbor starts to be used in the flooding procedure,
    and the two neighboring routers begin synchronizing their
    databases.  When this synchronization is finished, the neighbor
    is in state Full and we say that the two routers are fully
    adjacent.  At this point the adjacency is listed in LSAs.
    For a more detailed description of neighbor state changes,
    together with the additional actions involved in each change,
    see Section 10.3.
    Down
        This is the initial state of a neighbor conversation.  It
        indicates that there has been no recent information received
        from the neighbor.  On NBMA networks, Hello packets may
        still be sent to "Down" neighbors, although at a reduced
        frequency (see Section 9.5.1).
                               +----+
                               |Down|
                               +----+
                                 |\
                                 | \Start
                                 |  \      +-------+
                         Hello   |   +---->|Attempt|
                        Received |         +-------+
                                 |             |
                         +----+<-+             |HelloReceived
                         |Init|<---------------+
                         +----+<--------+
                            |           |
                            |2-Way      |1-Way
                            |Received   |Received
                            |           |
          +-------+         |        +-----+
          |ExStart|<--------+------->|2-Way|
          +-------+                  +-----+
          Figure 12: Neighbor state changes (Hello Protocol)
              In addition to the state transitions pictured,
              Event KillNbr always forces Down State,
              Event InactivityTimer always forces Down State,
              Event LLDown always forces Down State
                              +-------+
                              |ExStart|
                              +-------+
                                |
                 NegotiationDone|
                                +->+--------+
                                   |Exchange|
                                +--+--------+
                                |
                        Exchange|
                          Done  |
                +----+          |      +-------+
                |Full|<---------+----->|Loading|
                +----+<-+              +-------+
                        |  LoadingDone     |
                        +------------------+
        Figure 13: Neighbor state changes (Database Exchange)
            In addition to the state transitions pictured,
            Event SeqNumberMismatch forces ExStart state,
            Event BadLSReq forces ExStart state,
            Event 1-Way forces Init state,
            Event KillNbr always forces Down State,
            Event InactivityTimer always forces Down State,
            Event LLDown always forces Down State,
            Event AdjOK? leads to adjacency forming/breaking
    Attempt
        This state is only valid for neighbors attached to NBMA
        networks.  It indicates that no recent information has been
        received from the neighbor, but that a more concerted effort
        should be made to contact the neighbor.  This is done by
        sending the neighbor Hello packets at intervals of
        HelloInterval (see Section 9.5.1).
    Init
        In this state, an Hello packet has recently been seen from
        the neighbor.  However, bidirectional communication has not
        yet been established with the neighbor (i.e., the router
        itself did not appear in the neighbor's Hello packet).  All
        neighbors in this state (or higher) are listed in the Hello
        packets sent from the associated interface.
    2-Way
        In this state, communication between the two routers is
        bidirectional.  This has been assured by the operation of
        the Hello Protocol.  This is the most advanced state short
        of beginning adjacency establishment.  The (Backup)
        Designated Router is selected from the set of neighbors in
        state 2-Way or greater.
    ExStart
        This is the first step in creating an adjacency between the
        two neighboring routers.  The goal of this step is to decide
        which router is the master, and to decide upon the initial
        DD sequence number.  Neighbor conversations in this state or
        greater are called adjacencies.
    Exchange
        In this state the router is describing its entire link state
        database by sending Database Description packets to the
        neighbor.  Each Database Description Packet has a DD
        sequence number, and is explicitly acknowledged.  Only one
        Database Description Packet is allowed outstanding at any
        one time.  In this state, Link State Request Packets may
        also be sent asking for the neighbor's more recent LSAs.
        All adjacencies in Exchange state or greater are used by the
        flooding procedure.  In fact, these adjacencies are fully
        capable of transmitting and receiving all types of OSPF
        routing protocol packets.
    Loading
        In this state, Link State Request packets are sent to the
        neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that have been
        discovered (but not yet received) in the Exchange state.
    Full
        In this state, the neighboring routers are fully adjacent.
        These adjacencies will now appear in router-LSAs and
        network-LSAs.
10.2.  Events causing neighbor state changes
    State changes can be effected by a number of events.  These
    events are shown in the labels of the arcs in Figures 12 and 13.
    The label definitions are as follows:
    HelloReceived
        An Hello packet has been received from the neighbor.
    Start
        This is an indication that Hello Packets should now be sent
        to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds.  This
        event is generated only for neighbors associated with NBMA
        networks.
    2-WayReceived
        Bidirectional communication has been realized between the
        two neighboring routers.  This is indicated by the router
        seeing itself in the neighbor's Hello packet.
    NegotiationDone
        The Master/Slave relationship has been negotiated, and DD
        sequence numbers have been exchanged.  This signals the
        start of the sending/receiving of Database Description
        packets.  For more information on the generation of this
        event, consult Section 10.8.
    ExchangeDone
        Both routers have successfully transmitted a full sequence
        of Database Description packets.  Each router now knows what
        parts of its link state database are out of date.  For more
        information on the generation of this event, consult Section
        10.8.
    BadLSReq
        A Link State Request has been received for an LSA not
        contained in the database.  This indicates an error in the
        Database Exchange process.
    Loading Done
        Link State Updates have been received for all out-of-date
        portions of the database.  This is indicated by the Link
        state request list becoming empty after the Database
        Exchange process has completed.
    AdjOK?
        A decision must be made as to whether an adjacency should be
        established/maintained with the neighbor.  This event will
        start some adjacencies forming, and destroy others.
    The following events cause well developed neighbors to revert to
    lesser states.  Unlike the above events, these events may occur
    when the neighbor conversation is in any of a number of states.
    SeqNumberMismatch
        A Database Description packet has been received that either
        a) has an unexpected DD sequence number, b) unexpectedly has
        the Init bit set or c) has an Options field differing from
        the last Options field received in a Database Description
        packet.  Any of these conditions indicate that some error
        has occurred during adjacency establishment.
    1-Way
        An Hello packet has been received from the neighbor, in
        which the router is not mentioned.  This indicates that
        communication with the neighbor is not bidirectional.
    KillNbr
        This  is  an  indication that  all  communication  with  the
        neighbor  is now  impossible,  forcing  the  neighbor  to
        revert  to  Down  state.
    InactivityTimer
        The inactivity Timer has fired.  This means that no Hello
        packets have been seen recently from the neighbor.  The
        neighbor reverts to Down state.
    LLDown
        This is an indication from the lower level protocols that
        the neighbor is now unreachable.  For example, on an X.25
        network this could be indicated by an X.25 clear indication
        with appropriate cause and diagnostic fields.  This event
        forces the neighbor into Down state.
10.3.  The Neighbor state machine
    A detailed description of the neighbor state changes follows.
    Each state change is invoked by an event (Section 10.2).  This
    event may produce different effects, depending on the current
    state of the neighbor.  For this reason, the state machine below
    is organized by current neighbor state and received event.  Each
    entry in the state machine describes the resulting new neighbor
    state and the required set of additional actions.
    When a neighbor's state changes, it may be necessary to rerun
    the Designated Router election algorithm.  This is determined by
    whether the interface NeighborChange event is generated (see
    Section 9.2).  Also, if the Interface is in DR state (the router
    is itself Designated Router), changes in neighbor state may
    cause a new network-LSA to be originated (see Section 12.4).
    When the neighbor state machine needs to invoke the interface
    state machine, it should be done as a scheduled task (see
    Section 4.4).  This simplifies things, by ensuring that neither
    state machine will be executed recursively.
     State(s):  Down
        Event:  Start
    New state:  Attempt
       Action:  Send an Hello Packet to the neighbor (this neighbor
                is always associated with an NBMA network) and start
                the Inactivity Timer for the neighbor.  The timer's
                later firing would indicate that communication with
                the neighbor was not attained.
     State(s):  Attempt
        Event:  HelloReceived
    New state:  Init
       Action:  Restart the Inactivity Timer for the neighbor, since
                the neighbor has now been heard from.
     State(s):  Down
        Event:  HelloReceived
    New state:  Init
       Action:  Start the Inactivity Timer for the neighbor.  The
                timer's later firing would indicate that the
                neighbor is dead.
     State(s):  Init or greater
        Event:  HelloReceived
    New state:  No state change.
       Action:  Restart the Inactivity Timer for the neighbor, since
                the neighbor has again been heard from.
     State(s):  Init
        Event:  2-WayReceived
    New state:  Depends upon action routine.
       Action:  Determine whether an adjacency should be established
                with the neighbor (see Section 10.4).  If not, the
                new neighbor state is 2-Way.
                Otherwise (an adjacency should be established) the
                neighbor state transitions to ExStart.  Upon
                entering this state, the router increments the DD
                sequence number in the neighbor data structure.  If
                this is the first time that an adjacency has been
                attempted, the DD sequence number should be assigned
                some unique value (like the time of day clock).  It
                then declares itself master (sets the master/slave
                bit to master), and starts sending Database
                Description Packets, with the initialize (I), more
                (M) and master (MS) bits set.  This Database
                Description Packet should be otherwise empty.  This
                Database Description Packet should be retransmitted
                at intervals of RxmtInterval until the next state is
                entered (see Section 10.8).
     State(s):  ExStart
        Event:  NegotiationDone
    New state:  Exchange
       Action:  The router must list the contents of its entire area
                link state database in the neighbor Database summary
                list.  The area link state database consists of the
                router-LSAs, network-LSAs and summary-LSAs contained
                in the area structure, along with the AS-external-
                LSAs contained in the global structure.  AS-
                external-LSAs are omitted from a virtual neighbor's
                Database summary list.  AS-external-LSAs are omitted
                from the Database summary list if the area has been
                configured as a stub (see Section 3.6).  LSAs whose
                age is equal to MaxAge are instead added to the
                neighbor's Link state retransmission list.  A
                summary of the Database summary list will be sent to
                the neighbor in Database Description packets.  Each
                Database Description Packet has a DD sequence
                number, and is explicitly acknowledged.  Only one
                Database Description Packet is allowed outstanding
                at any one time.  For more detail on the sending and
                receiving of Database Description packets, see
                Sections 10.8 and 10.6.
     State(s):  Exchange
        Event:  ExchangeDone
    New state:  Depends upon action routine.
       Action:  If the neighbor Link state request list is empty,
                the new neighbor state is Full.  No other action is
                required.  This is an adjacency's final state.
                Otherwise, the new neighbor state is Loading.  Start
                (or continue) sending Link State Request packets to
                the neighbor (see Section 10.9).  These are requests
                for the neighbor's more recent LSAs (which were
                discovered but not yet received in the Exchange
                state).  These LSAs are listed in the Link state
                request list associated with the neighbor.
     State(s):  Loading
        Event:  Loading Done
    New state:  Full
       Action:  No action required.  This is an adjacency's final
                state.
     State(s):  2-Way
        Event:  AdjOK?
    New state:  Depends upon action routine.
       Action:  Determine whether an adjacency should be formed with
                the neighboring router (see Section 10.4).  If not,
                the neighbor state remains at 2-Way.  Otherwise,
                transition the neighbor state to ExStart and perform
                the actions associated with the above state machine
                entry for state Init and event 2-WayReceived.
     State(s):  ExStart or greater
        Event:  AdjOK?
    New state:  Depends upon action routine.
       Action:  Determine whether the neighboring router should
                still be adjacent.  If yes, there is no state change
                and no further action is necessary.
                Otherwise, the (possibly partially formed) adjacency
                must be destroyed.  The neighbor state transitions
                to 2-Way.  The Link state retransmission list,
                Database summary list and Link state request list
                are cleared of LSAs.
     State(s):  Exchange or greater
        Event:  SeqNumberMismatch
    New state:  ExStart
       Action:  The (possibly partially formed) adjacency is torn
                down, and then an attempt is made at
                reestablishment.  The neighbor state first
                transitions to ExStart.  The Link state
                retransmission list, Database summary list and Link
                state request list are cleared of LSAs.  Then the
                router increments the DD sequence number in the
                neighbor data structure, declares itself master
                (sets the master/slave bit to master), and starts
                sending Database Description Packets, with the
                initialize (I), more (M) and master (MS) bits set.
                This Database Description Packet should be otherwise
                empty (see Section 10.8).
     State(s):  Exchange or greater
        Event:  BadLSReq
    New state:  ExStart
       Action:  The action for event BadLSReq is exactly the same as
                for the neighbor event SeqNumberMismatch.  The
                (possibly partially formed) adjacency is torn down,
                and then an attempt is made at reestablishment.  For
                more information, see the neighbor state machine
                entry that is invoked when event SeqNumberMismatch
                is generated in state Exchange or greater.
     State(s):  Any state
        Event:  KillNbr
    New state:  Down
       Action:  The Link state retransmission list, Database summary
                list and Link state request list are cleared of
                LSAs.  Also, the Inactivity Timer is disabled.
     State(s):  Any state
        Event:  LLDown
    New state:  Down
       Action:  The Link state retransmission list, Database summary
                list and Link state request list are cleared of
                LSAs.  Also, the Inactivity Timer is disabled.
     State(s):  Any state
        Event:  InactivityTimer
    New state:  Down
       Action:  The Link state retransmission list, Database summary
                list and Link state request list are cleared of
                LSAs.
     State(s):  2-Way or greater
        Event:  1-WayReceived
    New state:  Init
       Action:  The Link state retransmission list, Database summary
                list and Link state request list are cleared of
                LSAs.
     State(s):  2-Way or greater
        Event:  2-WayReceived
    New state:  No state change.
       Action:  No action required.
     State(s):  Init
        Event:  1-WayReceived
    New state:  No state change.
       Action:  No action required.
10.4.  Whether to become adjacent
    Adjacencies are established with some subset of the router's
    neighbors.  Routers connected by point-to-point networks,
    Point-to-MultiPoint networks and virtual links always become
    adjacent.  On broadcast and NBMA networks, all routers become
    adjacent to both the Designated Router and the Backup Designated
    Router.
    The adjacency-forming decision occurs in two places in the
    neighbor state machine.  First, when bidirectional communication
    is initially established with the neighbor, and secondly, when
    the identity of the attached network's (Backup) Designated
    Router changes.  If the decision is made to not attempt an
    adjacency, the state of the neighbor communication stops at 2-
    Way.
    An adjacency should be established with a bidirectional neighbor
    when at least one of the following conditions holds:
    o   The underlying network type is point-to-point
    o   The underlying network type is Point-to-MultiPoint
    o   The underlying network type is virtual link
    o   The router itself is the Designated Router
    o   The router itself is the Backup Designated Router
    o   The neighboring router is the Designated Router
    o   The neighboring router is the Backup Designated Router
10.5.  Receiving Hello Packets
    This section explains the detailed processing of a received
    Hello Packet.  (See Section A.3.2 for the format of Hello
    packets.)  The generic input processing of OSPF packets will
    have checked the validity of the IP header and the OSPF packet
    header.  Next, the values of the Network Mask, HelloInterval,
    and RouterDeadInterval fields in the received Hello packet must
    be checked against the values configured for the receiving
    interface.  Any mismatch causes processing to stop and the
    packet to be dropped.  In other words, the above fields are
    really describing the attached network's configuration. However,
    there is one exception to the above rule: on point-to-point
    networks and on virtual links, the Network Mask in the received
    Hello Packet should be ignored.
    The receiving interface attaches to a single OSPF area (this
    could be the backbone).  The setting of the E-bit found in the
    Hello Packet's Options field must match this area's
    ExternalRoutingCapability.  If AS-external-LSAs are not flooded
    into/throughout the area (i.e, the area is a "stub") the E-bit
    must be clear in received Hello Packets, otherwise the E-bit
    must be set.  A mismatch causes processing to stop and the
    packet to be dropped.  The setting of the rest of the bits in
    the Hello Packet's Options field should be ignored.
    At this point, an attempt is made to match the source of the
    Hello Packet to one of the receiving interface's neighbors.  If
    the receiving interface connects to a broadcast, Point-to-
    MultiPoint or NBMA network the source is identified by the IP
    source address found in the Hello's IP header.  If the receiving
    interface connects to a point-to-point link or a virtual link,
    the source is identified by the Router ID found in the Hello's
    OSPF packet header.  The interface's current list of neighbors
    is contained in the interface's data structure.  If a matching
    neighbor structure cannot be found, (i.e., this is the first
    time the neighbor has been detected), one is created.  The
    initial state of a newly created neighbor is set to Down.
    When receiving an Hello Packet from a neighbor on a broadcast,
    Point-to-MultiPoint or NBMA network, set the neighbor
    structure's Neighbor ID equal to the Router ID found in the
    packet's OSPF header.  For these network types, the neighbor
    structure's Router Priority field, Neighbor's Designated Router
    field, and Neighbor's Backup Designated Router field are also
    set equal to the corresponding fields found in the received
    Hello Packet; changes in these fields should be noted for
    possible use in the steps below.  When receiving an Hello on a
    point-to-point network (but not on a virtual link) set the
    neighbor structure's Neighbor IP address to the packet's IP
    source address.
    Now the rest of the Hello Packet is examined, generating events
    to be given to the neighbor and interface state machines.  These
    state machines are specified either to be executed or scheduled
    (see Section 4.4).  For example, by specifying below that the
    neighbor state machine be executed in line, several neighbor
    state transitions may be effected by a single received Hello:
    o   Each Hello Packet causes the neighbor state machine to be
        executed with the event HelloReceived.
    o   Then the list of neighbors contained in the Hello Packet is
        examined.  If the router itself appears in this list, the
        neighbor state machine should be executed with the event 2-
        WayReceived.  Otherwise, the neighbor state machine should
        be executed with the event 1-WayReceived, and the processing
        of the packet stops.
    o   Next, if a change in the neighbor's Router Priority field
        was noted, the receiving interface's state machine is
        scheduled with the event NeighborChange.
    o   If the neighbor is both declaring itself to be Designated
        Router (Hello Packet's Designated Router field = Neighbor IP
        address) and the Backup Designated Router field in the
        packet is equal to 0.0.0.0 and the receiving interface is in
        state Waiting, the receiving interface's state machine is
        scheduled with the event BackupSeen.  Otherwise, if the
        neighbor is declaring itself to be Designated Router and it
        had not previously, or the neighbor is not declaring itself
        Designated Router where it had previously, the receiving
        interface's state machine is scheduled with the event
        NeighborChange.
    o   If the neighbor is declaring itself to be Backup Designated
        Router (Hello Packet's Backup Designated Router field =
        Neighbor IP address) and the receiving interface is in state
        Waiting, the receiving interface's state machine is
        scheduled with the event BackupSeen.  Otherwise, if the
        neighbor is declaring itself to be Backup Designated Router
        and it had not previously, or the neighbor is not declaring
        itself Backup Designated Router where it had previously, the
        receiving interface's state machine is scheduled with the
        event NeighborChange.
    On NBMA networks, receipt of an Hello Packet may also cause an
    Hello Packet to be sent back to the neighbor in response. See
    Section 9.5.1 for more details.
10.6.  Receiving Database Description Packets
    This section explains the detailed processing of a received
    Database Description Packet.  The incoming Database Description
    Packet has already been associated with a neighbor and receiving
    interface by the generic input packet processing (Section 8.2).
    Whether the Database Description packet should be accepted, and
    if so, how it should be further processed depends upon the
    neighbor state.
    If a Database Description packet is accepted, the following
    packet fields should be saved in the corresponding neighbor data
    structure under "last received Database Description packet":
    the packet's initialize(I), more (M) and master(MS) bits,
    Options field, and DD sequence number. If these fields are set
    identically in two consecutive Database Description packets
    received from the neighbor, the second Database Description
    packet is considered to be a "duplicate" in the processing
    described below.
    If the Interface MTU field in the Database Description packet
    indicates an IP datagram size that is larger than the router can
    accept on the receiving interface without fragmentation, the
    Database Description packet is rejected.  Otherwise, if the
    neighbor state is:
    Down
        The packet should be rejected.
    Attempt
        The packet should be rejected.
    Init
        The neighbor state machine should be executed with the event
        2-WayReceived.  This causes an immediate state change to
        either state 2-Way or state ExStart. If the new state is
        ExStart, the processing of the current packet should then
        continue in this new state by falling through to case
        ExStart below.
    2-Way
        The packet should be ignored.  Database Description Packets
        are used only for the purpose of bringing up adjacencies.[7]
    ExStart
        If the received packet matches one of the following cases,
        then the neighbor state machine should be executed with the
        event NegotiationDone (causing the state to transition to
        Exchange), the packet's Options field should be recorded in
        the neighbor structure's Neighbor Options field and the
        packet should be accepted as next in sequence and processed
        further (see below).  Otherwise, the packet should be
        ignored.
        o   The initialize(I), more (M) and master(MS) bits are set,
            the contents of the packet are empty, and the neighbor's
            Router ID is larger than the router's own.  In this case
            the router is now Slave.  Set the master/slave bit to
            slave, and set the neighbor data structure's DD sequence
            number to that specified by the master.
        o   The initialize(I) and master(MS) bits are off, the
            packet's DD sequence number equals the neighbor data
            structure's DD sequence number (indicating
            acknowledgment) and the neighbor's Router ID is smaller
            than the router's own.  In this case the router is
            Master.
    Exchange
        Duplicate Database Description packets are discarded by the
        master, and cause the slave to retransmit the last Database
        Description packet that it had sent. Otherwise (the packet
        is not a duplicate):
        o   If the state of the MS-bit is inconsistent with the
            master/slave state of the connection, generate the
            neighbor event SeqNumberMismatch and stop processing the
            packet.
        o   If the initialize(I) bit is set, generate the neighbor
            event SeqNumberMismatch and stop processing the packet.
        o   If the packet's Options field indicates a different set
            of optional OSPF capabilities than were previously
            received from the neighbor (recorded in the Neighbor
            Options field of the neighbor structure), generate the
            neighbor event SeqNumberMismatch and stop processing the
            packet.
        o   Database Description packets must be processed in
            sequence, as indicated by the packets' DD sequence
            numbers. If the router is master, the next packet
            received should have DD sequence number equal to the DD
            sequence number in the neighbor data structure. If the
            router is slave, the next packet received should have DD
            sequence number equal to one more than the DD sequence
            number stored in the neighbor data structure. In either
            case, if the packet is the next in sequence it should be
            accepted and its contents processed as specified below.
        o   Else, generate the neighbor event SeqNumberMismatch and
            stop processing the packet.
    Loading or Full
        In this state, the router has sent and received an entire
        sequence of Database Description Packets.  The only packets
        received should be duplicates (see above).  In particular,
        the packet's Options field should match the set of optional
        OSPF capabilities previously indicated by the neighbor
        (stored in the neighbor structure's Neighbor Options field).
        Any other packets received, including the reception of a
        packet with the Initialize(I) bit set, should generate the
        neighbor event SeqNumberMismatch.[8] Duplicates should be
        discarded by the master.  The slave must respond to
        duplicates by repeating the last Database Description packet
        that it had sent.
    When the router accepts a received Database Description Packet
    as the next in sequence the packet contents are processed as
    follows.  For each LSA listed, the LSA's LS type is checked for
    validity.  If the LS type is unknown (e.g., not one of the LS
    types 1-5 defined by this specification), or if this is an AS-
    external-LSA (LS type = 5) and the neighbor is associated with a
    stub area, generate the neighbor event SeqNumberMismatch and
    stop processing the packet.  Otherwise, the router looks up the
    LSA in its database to see whether it also has an instance of
    the LSA.  If it does not, or if the database copy is less recent
    (see Section 13.1), the LSA is put on the Link state request
    list so that it can be requested (immediately or at some later
    time) in Link State Request Packets.
    When the router accepts a received Database Description Packet
    as the next in sequence, it also performs the following actions,
    depending on whether it is master or slave:
    Master
        Increments the DD sequence number in the neighbor data
        structure.  If the router has already sent its entire
        sequence of Database Description Packets, and the just
        accepted packet has the more bit (M) set to 0, the neighbor
        event ExchangeDone is generated.  Otherwise, it should send
        a new Database Description to the slave.
    Slave
        Sets the DD sequence number in the neighbor data structure
        to the DD sequence number appearing in the received packet.
        The slave must send a Database Description Packet in reply.
        If the received packet has the more bit (M) set to 0, and
        the packet to be sent by the slave will also have the M-bit
        set to 0, the neighbor event ExchangeDone is generated.
        Note that the slave always generates this event before the
        master.
10.7.  Receiving Link State Request Packets
    This section explains the detailed processing of received Link
    State Request packets.  Received Link State Request Packets
    specify a list of LSAs that the neighbor wishes to receive.
    Link State Request Packets should be accepted when the neighbor
    is in states Exchange, Loading, or Full.  In all other states
    Link State Request Packets should be ignored.
    Each LSA specified in the Link State Request packet should be
    located in the router's database, and copied into Link State
    Update packets for transmission to the neighbor.  These LSAs
    should NOT be placed on the Link state retransmission list for
    the neighbor.  If an LSA cannot be found in the database,
    something has gone wrong with the Database Exchange process, and
    neighbor event BadLSReq should be generated.
10.8.  Sending Database Description Packets
    This section describes how Database Description Packets are sent
    to a neighbor. The Database Description packet's Interface MTU
    field is set to the size of the largest IP datagram that can be
    sent out the sending interface, without fragmentation.  Common
    MTUs in use in the Internet can be found in Table 7-1 of
    [Ref22]. Interface MTU should be set to 0 in Database
    Description packets sent over virtual links.
    The router's optional OSPF capabilities (see Section 4.5) are
    transmitted to the neighbor in the Options field of the Database
    Description packet.  The router should maintain the same set of
    optional capabilities throughout the Database Exchange and
    flooding procedures.  If for some reason the router's optional
    capabilities change, the Database Exchange procedure should be
    restarted by reverting to neighbor state ExStart.  One optional
    capability is defined in this specification (see Sections 4.5
    and A.2). The E-bit should be set if and only if the attached
    network belongs to a non-stub area. Unrecognized bits in the
    Options field should be set to zero.
    The sending of Database Description packets depends on the
    neighbor's state.  In state ExStart the router sends empty
    Database Description packets, with the initialize (I), more (M)
    and master (MS) bits set.  These packets are retransmitted every
    RxmtInterval seconds.
    In state Exchange the Database Description Packets actually
    contain summaries of the link state information contained in the
    router's database.  Each LSA in the area's link-state database
    (at the time the neighbor transitions into Exchange state) is
    listed in the neighbor Database summary list.  Each new Database
    Description Packet copies its DD sequence number from the
    neighbor data structure and then describes the current top of
    the Database summary list.  Items are removed from the Database
    summary list when the previous packet is acknowledged.
    In state Exchange, the determination of when to send a Database
    Description packet depends on whether the router is master or
    slave:
    Master
        Database Description packets are sent when either a) the
        slave acknowledges the previous Database Description packet
        by echoing the DD sequence number or b) RxmtInterval seconds
        elapse without an acknowledgment, in which case the previous
        Database Description packet is retransmitted.
    Slave
        Database Description packets are sent only in response to
        Database Description packets received from the master.  If
        the Database Description packet received from the master is
        new, a new Database Description packet is sent, otherwise
        the previous Database Description packet is resent.
    In states Loading and Full the slave must resend its last
    Database Description packet in response to duplicate Database
    Description packets received from the master.  For this reason
    the slave must wait RouterDeadInterval seconds before freeing
    the last Database Description packet.  Reception of a Database
    Description packet from the master after this interval will
    generate a SeqNumberMismatch neighbor event.
10.9.  Sending Link State Request Packets
    In neighbor states Exchange or Loading, the Link state request
    list contains a list of those LSAs that need to be obtained from
    the neighbor.  To request these LSAs, a router sends the
    neighbor the beginning of the Link state request list, packaged
    in a Link State Request packet.
    When the neighbor responds to these requests with the proper
    Link State Update packet(s), the Link state request list is
    truncated and a new Link State Request packet is sent.  This
    process continues until the Link state request list becomes
    empty. LSAs on the Link state request list that have been
    requested, but not yet received, are packaged into Link State
    Request packets for retransmission at intervals of RxmtInterval.
    There should be at most one Link State Request packet
    outstanding at any one time.
    When the Link state request list becomes empty, and the neighbor
    state is Loading (i.e., a complete sequence of Database
    Description packets has been sent to and received from the
    neighbor), the Loading Done neighbor event is generated.
10.10.  An Example
    Figure 14 shows an example of an adjacency forming.  Routers RT1
    and RT2 are both connected to a broadcast network.  It is
    assumed that RT2 is the Designated Router for the network, and
    that RT2 has a higher Router ID than Router RT1.
    The neighbor state changes realized by each router are listed on
    the sides of the figure.
    At the beginning of Figure 14, Router RT1's interface to the
    network becomes operational.  It begins sending Hello Packets,
    although it doesn't know the identity of the Designated Router
    or of any other neighboring routers.  Router RT2 hears this
    hello (moving the neighbor to Init state), and in its next Hello
    Packet indicates that it is itself the Designated Router and
    that it has heard Hello Packets from RT1.  This in turn causes
    RT1 to go to state ExStart, as it starts to bring up the
    adjacency.
    RT1 begins by asserting itself as the master.  When it sees that
    RT2 is indeed the master (because of RT2's higher Router ID),
    RT1 transitions to slave state and adopts its neighbor's DD
    sequence number.  Database Description packets are then
    exchanged, with polls coming from the master (RT2) and responses
    from the slave (RT1).  This sequence of Database Description
        +---+                                         +---+
        |RT1|                                         |RT2|
        +---+                                         +---+
        Down                                          Down
                        Hello(DR=0,seen=0)
                   ------------------------------>
                     Hello (DR=RT2,seen=RT1,...)      Init
                   <------------------------------
        ExStart        D-D (Seq=x,I,M,Master)
                   ------------------------------>
                       D-D (Seq=y,I,M,Master)         ExStart
                   <------------------------------
        Exchange       D-D (Seq=y,M,Slave)
                   ------------------------------>
                       D-D (Seq=y+1,M,Master)         Exchange
                   <------------------------------
                       D-D (Seq=y+1,M,Slave)
                   ------------------------------>
                                 ...
                                 ...
                                 ...
                       D-D (Seq=y+n, Master)
                   <------------------------------
                       D-D (Seq=y+n, Slave)
         Loading   ------------------------------>
                             LS Request                Full
                   ------------------------------>
                             LS Update
                   <------------------------------
                             LS Request
                   ------------------------------>
                             LS Update
                   <------------------------------
         Full
               Figure 14: An adjacency bring-up example
    Packets ends when both the poll and associated response has the
    M-bit off.
    In this example, it is assumed that RT2 has a completely up to
    date database.  In that case, RT2 goes immediately into Full
    state.  RT1 will go into Full state after updating the necessary
    parts of its database.  This is done by sending Link State
    Request Packets, and receiving Link State Update Packets in
    response.  Note that, while RT1 has waited until a complete set
    of Database Description Packets has been received (from RT2)
    before sending any Link State Request Packets, this need not be
    the case.  RT1 could have interleaved the sending of Link State
    Request Packets with the reception of Database Description
    Packets.

11. The Routing Table Structure

The routing table data structure contains all the information
necessary to forward an IP data packet toward its destination.  Each
routing table entry describes the collection of best paths to a
particular destination.  When forwarding an IP data packet, the
routing table entry providing the best match for the packet's IP
destination is located.  The matching routing table entry then
provides the next hop towards the packet's destination.  OSPF also
provides for the existence of a default route (Destination ID =
DefaultDestination, Address Mask =  0x00000000).  When the default
route exists, it matches all IP destinations (although any other
matching entry is a better match).  Finding the routing table entry
that best matches an IP destination is further described in Section
11.1.
There is a single routing table in each router.  Two sample routing
tables are described in Sections 11.2 and 11.3.  The building of the
routing table is discussed in Section 16.
The rest of this section defines the fields found in a routing table
entry.  The first set of fields describes the routing table entry's
destination.
Destination Type
    Destination type is either "network" or "router". Only network
    entries are actually used when forwarding IP data traffic.
    Router routing table entries are used solely as intermediate
    steps in the routing table build process.
    A network is a range of IP addresses, to which IP data traffic
    may be forwarded.  This includes IP networks (class A, B, or C),
    IP subnets, IP supernets and single IP hosts.  The default route
    also falls into this category.
    Router entries are kept for area border routers and AS boundary
    routers.  Routing table entries for area border routers are used
    when calculating the inter-area routes (see Section 16.2), and
    when maintaining configured virtual links (see Section 15).
    Routing table entries for AS boundary routers are used when
    calculating the AS external routes (see Section 16.4).
Destination ID
    The destination's identifier or name.  This depends on the
    Destination Type.  For networks, the identifier is their
    associated IP address.  For routers, the identifier is the OSPF
    Router ID.[9]
Address Mask
    Only defined for networks.  The network's IP address together
    with its address mask defines a range of IP addresses.  For IP
    subnets, the address mask is referred to as the subnet mask.
    For host routes, the mask is "all ones" (0xffffffff).
Optional Capabilities
    When the destination is a router this field indicates the
    optional OSPF capabilities supported by the destination router.
    The only optional capability defined by this specification is
    the ability to process AS-external-LSAs.  For a further
    discussion of OSPF's optional capabilities, see Section 4.5.
The set of paths to use for a destination may vary based on the OSPF
area to which the paths belong.  This means that there may be
multiple routing table entries for the same destination, depending
on the values of the next field.
Area
    This field indicates the area whose link state information has
    led to the routing table entry's collection of paths.  This is
    called the entry's associated area.  For sets of AS external
    paths, this field is not defined.  For destinations of type
    "router", there may be separate sets of paths (and therefore
    separate routing table entries) associated with each of several
    areas. For example, this will happen when two area border
    routers share multiple areas in common.  For destinations of
    type "network", only the set of paths associated with the best
    area (the one providing the preferred route) is kept.
The rest of the routing table entry describes the set of paths to
the destination.  The following fields pertain to the set of paths
as a whole.  In other words, each one of the paths contained in a
routing table entry is of the same path-type and cost (see below).
Path-type
    There are four possible types of paths used to route traffic to
    the destination, listed here in decreasing order of preference:
    intra-area, inter-area, type 1 external or type 2 external.
    Intra-area paths indicate destinations belonging to one of the
    router's attached areas.  Inter-area paths are paths to
    destinations in other OSPF areas.  These are discovered through
    the examination of received summary-LSAs.  AS external paths are
    paths to destinations external to the AS.  These are detected
    through the examination of received AS-external-LSAs.
Cost
    The link state cost of the path to the destination.  For all
    paths except type 2 external paths this describes the entire
    path's cost.  For Type 2 external paths, this field describes
    the cost of the portion of the path internal to the AS.  This
    cost is calculated as the sum of the costs of the path's
    constituent links.
Type 2 cost
    Only valid for type 2 external paths.  For these paths, this
    field indicates the cost of the path's external portion.  This
    cost has been advertised by an AS boundary router, and is the
    most significant part of the total path cost.  For example, a
    type 2 external path with type 2 cost of 5 is always preferred
    over a path with type 2 cost of 10, regardless of the cost of
    the two paths' internal components.
Link State Origin
    Valid only for intra-area paths, this field indicates the LSA
    (router-LSA or network-LSA) that directly references the
    destination.  For example, if the destination is a transit
    network, this is the transit network's network-LSA.  If the
    destination is a stub network, this is the router-LSA for the
    attached router.  The LSA is discovered during the shortest-path
    tree calculation (see Section 16.1).  Multiple LSAs may
    reference the destination, however a tie-breaking scheme always
    reduces the choice to a single LSA. The Link State Origin field
    is not used by the OSPF protocol, but it is used by the routing
    table calculation in OSPF's Multicast routing extensions
    (MOSPF).
When multiple paths of equal path-type and cost exist to a
destination (called elsewhere "equal-cost" paths), they are stored
in a single routing table entry.  Each one of the "equal-cost" paths
is distinguished by the following fields:
Next hop
    The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to
    the destination.  On broadcast, Point-to-MultiPoint and NBMA
    networks, the next hop also includes the IP address of the next
    router (if any) in the path towards the destination.
Advertising router
    Valid only for inter-area and AS external paths.  This field
    indicates the Router ID of the router advertising the summary-
    LSA or AS-external-LSA that led to this path.
11.1.  Routing table lookup
    When an IP data packet is received, an OSPF router finds the
    routing table entry that best matches the packet's destination.
    This routing table entry then provides the outgoing interface
    and next hop router to use in forwarding the packet. This
    section describes the process of finding the best matching
    routing table entry.
    Before the lookup begins, "discard" routing table entries should
    be inserted into the routing table for each of the router's
    active area address ranges (see Section 3.5).  (An area range is
    considered "active" if the range contains one or more networks
    reachable by intra-area paths.) The destination of a "discard"
    entry is the set of addresses described by its associated active
    area address range, and the path type of each "discard" entry is
    set to "inter-area".[10]
    Several routing table entries may match the destination address.
    In this case, the "best match" is the routing table entry that
    provides the most specific (longest) match. Another way of
    saying this is to choose the entry that specifies the narrowest
    range of IP addresses.[11] For example, the entry for the
    address/mask pair of (128.185.1.0, 0xffffff00) is more specific
    than an entry for the pair (128.185.0.0, 0xffff0000). The
    default route is the least specific match, since it matches all
    destinations. (Note that for any single routing table entry,
    multiple paths may be possible. In these cases, the calculations
    in Sections 16.1, 16.2, and 16.4 always yield the paths having
    the most preferential path-type, as described in Section 11).
    If there is no matching routing table entry, or the best match
    routing table entry is one of the above "discard" routing table
    entries, then the packet's IP destination is considered
    unreachable. Instead of being forwarded, the packet should then
    be discarded and an ICMP destination unreachable message should
    be returned to the packet's source.
11.2.  Sample routing table, without areas
    Consider the Autonomous System pictured in Figure 2.  No OSPF
    areas have been configured.  A single metric is shown per
    outbound interface.  The calculation of Router RT6's routing
    table proceeds as described in Section 2.2.  The resulting
    routing table is shown in Table 12.  Destination types are
    abbreviated: Network as "N", Router as "R".
    There are no instances of multiple equal-cost shortest paths in
    this example.  Also, since there are no areas, there are no
    inter-area paths.
    Routers RT5 and RT7 are AS boundary routers.  Intra-area routes
    have been calculated to Routers RT5 and RT7.  This allows
    external routes to be calculated to the destinations advertised
    by RT5 and RT7 (i.e., Networks N12, N13, N14 and N15).  It is
    assumed all AS-external-LSAs originated by RT5 and RT7 are
    advertising type 1 external metrics.  This results in type 1
    external paths being calculated to destinations N12-N15.
11.3.  Sample routing table, with areas
    Consider the previous example, this time split into OSPF areas.
    An OSPF area configuration is pictured in Figure 6.  Router
    RT4's routing table will be described for this area
    configuration.  Router RT4 has a connection to Area 1 and a
    backbone connection.  This causes Router RT4 to view the AS as
    the concatenation of the two graphs shown in Figures 7 and 8.
    The resulting routing table is displayed in Table 13.
    Again, Routers RT5 and RT7 are AS boundary routers.  Routers
    RT3, RT4, RT7, RT10 and RT11 are area border routers.  Note that
    there are two routing entries for the area border router RT3,
    since it has two areas in common with RT4 (Area 1 and the
    backbone).
    Backbone paths have been calculated to all area border routers.
    These are used when determining the inter-area routes.  Note
    that all of the inter-area routes are associated with the
    backbone; this is always the case when the calculating router is
    itself an area border router.  Routing information is condensed
    at area boundaries.  In this example, we assume that Area 3 has
    been defined so that networks N9-N11 and the host route to H1
  Type   Dest   Area   Path  Type    Cost   Next     Adv.
                                            Hop(s)   Router(s)
  ____________________________________________________________
  N      N1     0      intra-area    10     RT3      *
  N      N2     0      intra-area    10     RT3      *
  N      N3     0      intra-area    7      RT3      *
  N      N4     0      intra-area    8      RT3      *
  N      Ib     0      intra-area    7      *        *
  N      Ia     0      intra-area    12     RT10     *
  N      N6     0      intra-area    8      RT10     *
  N      N7     0      intra-area    12     RT10     *
  N      N8     0      intra-area    10     RT10     *
  N      N9     0      intra-area    11     RT10     *
  N      N10    0      intra-area    13     RT10     *
  N      N11    0      intra-area    14     RT10     *
  N      H1     0      intra-area    21     RT10     *
  R      RT5    0      intra-area    6      RT5      *
  R      RT7    0      intra-area    8      RT10     *
  ____________________________________________________________
  N      N12    *      type 1 ext.   10     RT10     RT7
  N      N13    *      type 1 ext.   14     RT5      RT5
  N      N14    *      type 1 ext.   14     RT5      RT5
  N      N15    *      type 1 ext.   17     RT10     RT7
           Table 12: The routing table for Router RT6
                     (no configured areas).
    are all condensed to a single route when advertised into the
    backbone (by Router RT11).  Note that the cost of this route is
    the maximum of the set of costs to its individual components.
    There is a virtual link configured between Routers RT10 and
    RT11.  Without this configured virtual link, RT11 would be
    unable to advertise a route for networks N9-N11 and Host H1 into
    the backbone, and there would not be an entry for these networks
    in Router RT4's routing table.
    In this example there are two equal-cost paths to Network N12.
    However, they both use the same next hop (Router RT5).
    Router RT4's routing table would improve (i.e., some of the
    paths in the routing table would become shorter) if an
    additional virtual link were configured between Router RT4 and
    Router RT3.  The new virtual link would itself be associated
    with the first entry for area border router RT3 in Table 13 (an
    intra-area path through Area 1).  This would yield a cost of 1
    for the virtual link.  The routing table entries changes that
    would be caused by the addition of this virtual link are shown

Type Dest Area Path Type Cost Next Adv.

                                              Hops(s)   Router(s)

__________________________________________________________________ N N1 1 intra-area 4 RT1 * N N2 1 intra-area 4 RT2 * N N3 1 intra-area 1 * * N N4 1 intra-area 3 RT3 * R RT3 1 intra-area 1 * * __________________________________________________________________ N Ib 0 intra-area 22 RT5 * N Ia 0 intra-area 27 RT5 * R RT3 0 intra-area 21 RT5 * R RT5 0 intra-area 8 * * R RT7 0 intra-area 14 RT5 * R RT10 0 intra-area 22 RT5 * R RT11 0 intra-area 25 RT5 * __________________________________________________________________ N N6 0 inter-area 15 RT5 RT7 N N7 0 inter-area 19 RT5 RT7 N N8 0 inter-area 18 RT5 RT7 N N9-N11,H1 0 inter-area 36 RT5 RT11 __________________________________________________________________ N N12 * type 1 ext. 16 RT5 RT5,RT7 N N13 * type 1 ext. 16 RT5 RT5 N N14 * type 1 ext. 16 RT5 RT5 N N15 * type 1 ext. 23 RT5 RT7

              Table 13: Router RT4's routing table
                   in the presence of areas.
    in Table 14.

12. Link State Advertisements (LSAs)

Each router in the Autonomous System originates one or more link
state advertisements (LSAs).  This memo defines five distinct types
of LSAs, which are described in Section 4.3.  The collection of LSAs
forms the link-state database.  Each separate type of LSA has a
separate function.  Router-LSAs and network-LSAs describe how an
area's routers and networks are interconnected.  Summary-LSAs
provide a way of condensing an area's routing information.  AS-
external-LSAs provide a way of transparently advertising
externally-derived routing information throughout the Autonomous
System.
Each LSA begins with a standard 20-byte header.  This LSA header is
discussed below.
Type   Dest        Area   Path  Type   Cost   Next     Adv.
                                              Hop(s)   Router(s)
________________________________________________________________
N      Ib          0      intra-area   16     RT3      *
N      Ia          0      intra-area   21     RT3      *
R      RT3         0      intra-area   1      *        *
R      RT10        0      intra-area   16     RT3      *
R      RT11        0      intra-area   19     RT3      *
________________________________________________________________
N      N9-N11,H1   0      inter-area   30     RT3      RT11
              Table 14: Changes resulting from an
                    additional virtual link.
12.1.  The LSA Header
    The LSA header contains the LS type, Link State ID and
    Advertising Router fields.  The combination of these three
    fields uniquely identifies the LSA.
    There may be several instances of an LSA present in the
    Autonomous System, all at the same time.  It must then be
    determined which instance is more recent.  This determination is
    made by examining the LS sequence, LS checksum and LS age
    fields.  These fields are also contained in the 20-byte LSA
    header.
    Several of the OSPF packet types list LSAs.  When the instance
    is not important, an LSA is referred to by its LS type, Link
    State ID and Advertising Router (see Link State Request
    Packets).  Otherwise, the LS sequence number, LS age and LS
    checksum fields must also be referenced.
    A detailed explanation of the fields contained in the LSA header
    follows.
    12.1.1.  LS age
        This field is the age of the LSA in seconds.  It should be
        processed as an unsigned 16-bit integer.  It is set to 0
        when the LSA is originated.  It must be incremented by
        InfTransDelay on every hop of the flooding procedure.  LSAs
        are also aged as they are held in each router's database.
        The age of an LSA is never incremented past MaxAge.  LSAs
        having age MaxAge are not used in the routing table
        calculation.  When an LSA's age first reaches MaxAge, it is
        reflooded.  An LSA of age MaxAge is finally flushed from the
        database when it is no longer needed to ensure database
        synchronization.  For more information on the aging of LSAs,
        consult Section 14.
        The LS age field is examined when a router receives two
        instances of an LSA, both having identical LS sequence
        numbers and LS checksums.  An instance of age MaxAge is then
        always accepted as most recent; this allows old LSAs to be
        flushed quickly from the routing domain.  Otherwise, if the
        ages differ by more than MaxAgeDiff, the instance having the
        smaller age is accepted as most recent.[12] See Section 13.1
        for more details.
    12.1.2.  Options
        The Options field in the LSA header indicates which optional
        capabilities are associated with the LSA.  OSPF's optional
        capabilities are described in Section 4.5.  One optional
        capability is defined by this specification, represented by
        the E-bit found in the Options field.  The unrecognized bits
        in the Options field should be set to zero.
        The E-bit represents OSPF's ExternalRoutingCapability.  This
        bit should be set in all LSAs associated with the backbone,
        and all LSAs associated with non-stub areas (see Section
        3.6).  It should also be set in all AS-external-LSAs.  It
        should be reset in all router-LSAs, network-LSAs and
        summary-LSAs associated with a stub area.  For all LSAs, the
        setting of the E-bit is for informational purposes only; it
        does not affect the routing table calculation.
    12.1.3.  LS type
        The LS type field dictates the format and function of the
        LSA.  LSAs of different types have different names (e.g.,
        router-LSAs or network-LSAs).  All LSA types defined by this
        memo, except the AS-external-LSAs (LS type = 5), are flooded
        throughout a single area only.  AS-external-LSAs are flooded
        throughout the entire Autonomous System, excepting stub
        areas (see Section 3.6).  Each separate LSA type is briefly
        described below in Table 15.
    12.1.4.  Link State ID
        This field identifies the piece of the routing domain that
        is being described by the LSA.  Depending on the LSA's LS
        type, the Link State ID takes on the values listed in Table
        LS Type   LSA description
        ________________________________________________
        1         These are the router-LSAs.
                  They describe the collected
                   states of the router's
                  interfaces. For more information,
                  consult Section 12.4.1.
        ________________________________________________
        2         These are the network-LSAs.
                  They describe the set of routers
                  attached to the network. For
                  more information, consult
                  Section 12.4.2.
        ________________________________________________
        3 or 4    These are the summary-LSAs.
                  They describe inter-area routes,
                  and enable the condensation of
                  routing information at area
                  borders. Originated by area border
                  routers, the Type 3 summary-LSAs
                  describe routes to networks while the
                  Type 4 summary-LSAs describe routes to
                  AS boundary routers.
        ________________________________________________
        5         These are the AS-external-LSAs.
                  Originated by AS boundary routers,
                  they describe routes
                  to destinations external to the
                  Autonomous System. A default route for
                  the Autonomous System can also be
                  described by an AS-external-LSA.
        Table 15: OSPF link state advertisements (LSAs).
        16.
        Actually, for Type 3 summary-LSAs (LS type = 3) and AS-
        external-LSAs (LS type = 5), the Link State ID may
        LS Type   Link State ID
        _______________________________________________
        1         The originating router's Router ID.
        2         The IP interface address of the
                  network's Designated Router.
        3         The destination network's IP address.
        4         The Router ID of the described AS
                  boundary router.
        5         The destination network's IP address.
               Table 16: The LSA's Link State ID.
        additionally have one or more of the destination network's
        "host" bits set. For example, when originating an AS-
        external-LSA for the network 10.0.0.0 with mask of
        255.0.0.0, the Link State ID can be set to anything in the
        range 10.0.0.0 through 10.255.255.255 inclusive (although
        10.0.0.0 should be used whenever possible). The freedom to
        set certain host bits allows a router to originate separate
        LSAs for two networks having the same address but different
        masks. See Appendix E for details.
        When the LSA is describing a network (LS type = 2, 3 or 5),
        the network's IP address is easily derived by masking the
        Link State ID with the network/subnet mask contained in the
        body of the LSA.  When the LSA is describing a router (LS
        type = 1 or 4), the Link State ID is always the described
        router's OSPF Router ID.
        When an AS-external-LSA (LS Type = 5) is describing a
        default route, its Link State ID is set to
        DefaultDestination (0.0.0.0).
    12.1.5.  Advertising Router
        This field specifies the OSPF Router ID of the LSA's
        originator.  For router-LSAs, this field is identical to the
        Link State ID field.  Network-LSAs are originated by the
        network's Designated Router.  Summary-LSAs originated by
        area border routers.  AS-external-LSAs are originated by AS
        boundary routers.
    12.1.6.  LS sequence number
        The sequence number field is a signed 32-bit integer.  It is
        used to detect old and duplicate LSAs.  The space of
        sequence numbers is linearly ordered.  The larger the
        sequence number (when compared as signed 32-bit integers)
        the more recent the LSA.  To describe to sequence number
        space more precisely, let N refer in the discussion below to
        the constant 2**31.
        The sequence number -N (0x80000000) is reserved (and
        unused).  This leaves -N + 1 (0x80000001) as the smallest
        (and therefore oldest) sequence number; this sequence number
        is referred to as the constant InitialSequenceNumber. A
        router uses InitialSequenceNumber the first time it
        originates any LSA.  Afterwards, the LSA's sequence number
        is incremented each time the router originates a new
        instance of the LSA.  When an attempt is made to increment
        the sequence number past the maximum value of N - 1
        (0x7fffffff; also referred to as MaxSequenceNumber), the
        current instance of the LSA must first be flushed from the
        routing domain.  This is done by prematurely aging the LSA
        (see Section 14.1) and reflooding it.  As soon as this flood
        has been acknowledged by all adjacent neighbors, a new
        instance can be originated with sequence number of
        InitialSequenceNumber.
        The router may be forced to promote the sequence number of
        one of its LSAs when a more recent instance of the LSA is
        unexpectedly received during the flooding process.  This
        should be a rare event.  This may indicate that an out-of-
        date LSA, originated by the router itself before its last
        restart/reload, still exists in the Autonomous System.  For
        more information see Section 13.4.
    12.1.7.  LS checksum
        This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the
        LSA, excepting the LS age field.  The LS age field is
        excepted so that an LSA's age can be incremented without
        updating the checksum.  The checksum used is the same that
        is used for ISO connectionless datagrams; it is commonly
        referred to as the Fletcher checksum.  It is documented in
        Annex B of [Ref6].  The LSA header also contains the length
        of the LSA in bytes; subtracting the size of the LS age
        field (two bytes) yields the amount of data to checksum.
        The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an LSA.
        This corruption can occur while an LSA is being flooded, or
        while it is being held in a router's memory.  The LS
        checksum field cannot take on the value of zero; the
        occurrence of such a value should be considered a checksum
        failure.  In other words, calculation of the checksum is not
        optional.
        The checksum of an LSA is verified in two cases:  a) when it
        is received in a Link State Update Packet and b) at times
        during the aging of the link state database.  The detection
        of a checksum failure leads to separate actions in each
        case.  See Sections 13 and 14 for more details.
        Whenever the LS sequence number field indicates that two
        instances of an LSA are the same, the LS checksum field is
        examined.  If there is a difference, the instance with the
        larger LS checksum is considered to be most recent.[13] See
        Section 13.1 for more details.
12.2.  The link state database
    A router has a separate link state database for every area to
    which it belongs. All routers belonging to the same area have
    identical link state databases for the area.
    The databases for each individual area are always dealt with
    separately.  The shortest path calculation is performed
    separately for each area (see Section 16).  Components of the
    area link-state database are flooded throughout the area only.
    Finally, when an adjacency (belonging to Area A) is being
    brought up, only the database for Area A is synchronized between
    the two routers.
    The area database is composed of router-LSAs, network-LSAs and
    summary-LSAs (all listed in the area data structure).  In
    addition, external routes (AS-external-LSAs) are included in all
    non-stub area databases (see Section 3.6).
    An implementation of OSPF must be able to access individual
    pieces of an area database.  This lookup function is based on an
    LSA's LS type, Link State ID and Advertising Router.[14] There
    will be a single instance (the most up-to-date) of each LSA in
    the database.  The database lookup function is invoked during
    the LSA flooding procedure (Section 13) and the routing table
    calculation (Section 16).  In addition, using this lookup
    function the router can determine whether it has itself ever
    originated a particular LSA, and if so, with what LS sequence
    number.
    An LSA is added to a router's database when either a) it is
    received during the flooding process (Section 13) or b) it is
    originated by the router itself (Section 12.4).  An LSA is
    deleted from a router's database when either a) it has been
    overwritten by a newer instance during the flooding process
    (Section 13) or b) the router originates a newer instance of one
    of its self-originated LSAs (Section 12.4) or c) the LSA ages
    out and is flushed from the routing domain (Section 14).
    Whenever an LSA is deleted from the database it must also be
    removed from all neighbors' Link state retransmission lists (see
    Section 10).
12.3.  Representation of TOS
    For backward compatibility with previous versions of the OSPF
    specification ([Ref9]), TOS-specific information can be included
    in router-LSAs, summary-LSAs and AS-external-LSAs.  The encoding
    of TOS in OSPF LSAs is specified in Table 17. That table relates
    the OSPF encoding to the IP packet header's TOS field (defined
    in [Ref12]).  The OSPF encoding is expressed as a decimal
    integer, and the IP packet header's TOS field is expressed in
    the binary TOS values used in [Ref12].
                OSPF encoding   RFC 1349 TOS values
                ___________________________________________
                0               0000 normal service
                2               0001 minimize monetary cost
                4               0010 maximize reliability
                6               0011
                8               0100 maximize throughput
                10              0101
                12              0110
                14              0111
                16              1000 minimize delay
                18              1001
                20              1010
                22              1011
                24              1100
                26              1101
                28              1110
                30              1111
                    Table 17: Representing TOS in OSPF.
12.4.  Originating LSAs
    Into any given OSPF area, a router will originate several LSAs.
    Each router originates a router-LSA.  If the router is also the
    Designated Router for any of the area's networks, it will
    originate network-LSAs for those networks.
    Area border routers originate a single summary-LSA for each
    known inter-area destination.  AS boundary routers originate a
    single AS-external-LSA for each known AS external destination.
    Destinations are advertised one at a time so that the change in
    any single route can be flooded without reflooding the entire
    collection of routes.  During the flooding procedure, many LSAs
    can be carried by a single Link State Update packet.
    As an example, consider Router RT4 in Figure 6.  It is an area
    border router, having a connection to Area 1 and the backbone.
    Router RT4 originates 5 distinct LSAs into the backbone (one
    router-LSA, and one summary-LSA for each of the networks N1-N4).
    Router RT4 will also originate 8 distinct LSAs into Area 1 (one
    router-LSA and seven summary-LSAs as pictured in Figure 7).  If
    RT4 has been selected as Designated Router for Network N3, it
    will also originate a network-LSA for N3 into Area 1.
    In this same figure, Router RT5 will be originating 3 distinct
    AS-external-LSAs (one for each of the networks N12-N14).  These
    will be flooded throughout the entire AS, assuming that none of
    the areas have been configured as stubs.  However, if area 3 has
    been configured as a stub area, the AS-external-LSAs for
    networks N12-N14 will not be flooded into area 3 (see Section
    3.6).  Instead, Router RT11 would originate a default summary-
    LSA that would be flooded throughout area 3 (see Section
    12.4.3).  This instructs all of area 3's internal routers to
    send their AS external traffic to RT11.
    Whenever a new instance of an LSA is originated, its LS sequence
    number is incremented, its LS age is set to 0, its LS checksum
    is calculated, and the LSA is added to the link state database
    and flooded out the appropriate interfaces.  See Section 13.2
    for details concerning the installation of the LSA into the link
    state database.  See Section 13.3 for details concerning the
    flooding of newly originated LSAs.
    The ten events that can cause a new instance of an LSA to be
    originated are:
    (1) The LS age field of one of the router's self-originated LSAs
        reaches the value LSRefreshTime. In this case, a new
        instance of the LSA is originated, even though the contents
        of the LSA (apart from the LSA header) will be the same.
        This guarantees periodic originations of all LSAs.  This
        periodic updating of LSAs adds robustness to the link state
        algorithm.  LSAs that solely describe unreachable
        destinations should not be refreshed, but should instead be
        flushed from the routing domain (see Section 14.1).
    When whatever is being described by an LSA changes, a new LSA is
    originated.  However, two instances of the same LSA may not be
    originated within the time period MinLSInterval.  This may
    require that the generation of the next instance be delayed by
    up to MinLSInterval.  The following events may cause the
    contents of an LSA to change.  These events should cause new
    originations if and only if the contents of the new LSA would be
    different:
    (2) An interface's state changes (see Section 9.1).  This may
        mean that it is necessary to produce a new instance of the
        router-LSA.
    (3) An attached network's Designated Router changes.  A new
        router-LSA should be originated.  Also, if the router itself
        is now the Designated Router, a new network-LSA should be
        produced.  If the router itself is no longer the Designated
        Router, any network-LSA that it might have originated for
        the network should be flushed from the routing domain (see
        Section 14.1).
    (4) One of the neighboring routers changes to/from the FULL
        state.  This may mean that it is necessary to produce a new
        instance of the router-LSA.  Also, if the router is itself
        the Designated Router for the attached network, a new
        network-LSA should be produced.
    The next four events concern area border routers only:
    (5) An intra-area route has been added/deleted/modified in the
        routing table.  This may cause a new instance of a summary-
        LSA (for this route) to be originated in each attached area
        (possibly including the backbone).
    (6) An inter-area route has been added/deleted/modified in the
        routing table.  This may cause a new instance of a summary-
        LSA (for this route) to be originated in each attached area
        (but NEVER for the backbone).
    (7) The router becomes newly attached to an area.  The router
        must then originate summary-LSAs into the newly attached
        area for all pertinent intra-area and inter-area routes in
        the router's routing table.  See Section 12.4.3 for more
        details.
    (8) When the state of one of the router's configured virtual
        links changes, it may be necessary to originate a new
        router-LSA into the virtual link's Transit area (see the
        discussion of the router-LSA's bit V in Section 12.4.1), as
        well as originating a new router-LSA into the backbone.
    The last two events concern AS boundary routers (and former AS
    boundary routers) only:
    (9) An external route gained through direct experience with an
        external routing protocol (like BGP) changes.  This will
        cause an AS boundary router to originate a new instance of
        an AS-external-LSA.
    (10)
        A router ceases to be an AS boundary router, perhaps after
        restarting. In this situation the router should flush all
        AS-external-LSAs that it had previously originated.  These
        LSAs can be flushed via the premature aging procedure
        specified in Section 14.1.
    The construction of each type of LSA is explained in detail
    below.  In general, these sections describe the contents of the
    LSA body (i.e., the part coming after the 20-byte LSA header).
    For information concerning the building of the LSA header, see
    Section 12.1.
    12.4.1.  Router-LSAs
        A router originates a router-LSA for each area that it
        belongs to.  Such an LSA describes the collected states of
        the router's links to the area.  The LSA is flooded
        throughout the particular area, and no further.
              . 192.1.2                   Area 1 .
              .     +                            .
              .     |                            .
              .     | 3+---+1                    .
              .  N1 |--|RT1|-----+               .
              .     |  +---+      \              .
              .     |              \  _______N3  .
              .     +               \/       \   .  1+---+
              .                     * 192.1.1 *------|RT4|
              .     +               /\_______/   .   +---+
              .     |              /     |       .
              .     | 3+---+1     /      |       .
              .  N2 |--|RT2|-----+      1|       .
              .     |  +---+           +---+8    .         6+---+
              .     |                  |RT3|----------------|RT6|
              .     +                  +---+     .          +---+
              . 192.1.3                  |2      .   18.10.0.6|7
              .                          |       .            |
              .                   +------------+ .
              .                     192.1.4 (N4) .
                Figure 15: Area 1 with IP addresses shown
        The format of a router-LSA is shown in Appendix A (Section
        A.4.2).  The first 20 bytes of the LSA consist of the
        generic LSA header that was discussed in Section 12.1.
        router-LSAs have LS type = 1.
        A router also indicates whether it is an area border router,
        or an AS boundary router, by setting the appropriate bits
        (bit B and bit E, respectively) in its router-LSAs. This
        enables paths to those types of routers to be saved in the
        routing table, for later processing of summary-LSAs and AS-
        external-LSAs.  Bit B should be set whenever the router is
        actively attached to two or more areas, even if the router
        is not currently attached to the OSPF backbone area.  Bit E
        should never be set in a router-LSA for a stub area (stub
        areas cannot contain AS boundary routers).
        In addition, the router sets bit V in its router-LSA for
        Area A if and only if the router is the endpoint of one or
        more fully adjacent virtual links having Area A as their
        Transit area. The setting of bit V enables other routers in
        Area A to discover whether the area supports transit traffic
        (see TransitCapability in Section 6).
        The router-LSA then describes the router's working
        connections (i.e., interfaces or links) to the area.  Each
        link is typed according to the kind of attached network.
        Each link is also labelled with its Link ID.  This Link ID
        gives a name to the entity that is on the other end of the
        link.  Table 18 summarizes the values used for the Type and
        Link ID fields.
               Link type   Description       Link ID
               __________________________________________________
               1           Point-to-point    Neighbor Router ID
                           link
               2           Link to transit   Interface address of
                           network           Designated Router
               3           Link to stub      IP network number
                           network
               4           Virtual link      Neighbor Router ID
                       Table 18: Link descriptions in the
                                  router-LSA.
        In addition, the Link Data field is specified for each link.
        This field gives 32 bits of extra information for the link.
        For links to transit networks, numbered point-to-point links
        and virtual links, this field specifies the IP interface
        address of the associated router interface (this is needed
        by the routing table calculation, see Section 16.1.1).  For
        links to stub networks, this field specifies the stub
        network's IP address mask.  For unnumbered point-to-point
        links, the Link Data field should be set to the unnumbered
        interface's MIB-II [Ref8] ifIndex value.
        Finally, the cost of using the link for output is specified.
        The output cost of a link is configurable.  With the
        exception of links to stub networks, the output cost must
        always be non-zero.
        To further describe the process of building the list of link
        descriptions, suppose a router wishes to build a router-LSA
        for Area A.  The router examines its collection of interface
        data structures.  For each interface, the following steps
        are taken:
        o   If the attached network does not belong to Area A, no
            links are added to the LSA, and the next interface
            should be examined.
        o   If the state of the interface is Down, no links are
            added.
        o   If the state of the interface is Loopback, add a Type 3
            link (stub network) as long as this is not an interface
            to an unnumbered point-to-point network.  The Link ID
            should be set to the IP interface address, the Link Data
            set to the mask 0xffffffff (indicating a host route),
            and the cost set to 0.
        o   Otherwise, the link descriptions added to the router-LSA
            depend on the OSPF interface type. Link descriptions
            used for point-to-point interfaces are specified in
            Section 12.4.1.1, for virtual links in Section 12.4.1.2,
            for broadcast and NBMA interfaces in 12.4.1.3, and for
            Point-to-MultiPoint interfaces in 12.4.1.4.
        After consideration of all the router interfaces, host links
        are added to the router-LSA by examining the list of
        attached hosts belonging to Area A.  A host route is
        represented as a Type 3 link (stub network) whose Link ID is
        the host's IP address, Link Data is the mask of all ones
        (0xffffffff), and cost the host's configured cost (see
        Section C.7).
        12.4.1.1.  Describing point-to-point interfaces
            For point-to-point interfaces, one or more link
            descriptions are added to the router-LSA as follows:
            o   If the neighboring router is fully adjacent, add a
                Type 1 link (point-to-point). The Link ID should be
                set to the Router ID of the neighboring router. For
                numbered point-to-point networks, the Link Data
                should specify the IP interface address. For
                unnumbered point-to-point networks, the Link Data
                field should specify the interface's MIB-II [Ref8]
                ifIndex value. The cost should be set to the output
                cost of the point-to-point interface.
            o   In addition, as long as the state of the interface
                is "Point-to-Point" (and regardless of the
                neighboring router state), a Type 3 link (stub
                network) should be added. There are two forms that
                this stub link can take:
                Option 1
                    Assuming that the neighboring router's IP
                    address is known, set the Link ID of the Type 3
                    link to the neighbor's IP address, the Link Data
                    to the mask 0xffffffff (indicating a host
                    route), and the cost to the interface's
                    configured output cost.[15]
                Option 2
                    If a subnet has been assigned to the point-to-
                    point link, set the Link ID of the Type 3 link
                    to the subnet's IP address, the Link Data to the
                    subnet's mask, and the cost to the interface's
                    configured output cost.[16]
        12.4.1.2.  Describing broadcast and NBMA interfaces
            For operational broadcast and NBMA interfaces, a single
            link description is added to the router-LSA as follows:
            o   If the state of the interface is Waiting, add a Type
                3 link (stub network) with Link ID set to the IP
                network number of the attached network, Link Data
                set to the attached network's address mask, and cost
                equal to the interface's configured output cost.
            o   Else, there has been a Designated Router elected for
                the attached network.  If the router is fully
                adjacent to the Designated Router, or if the router
                itself is Designated Router and is fully adjacent to
                at least one other router, add a single Type 2 link
                (transit network) with Link ID set to the IP
                interface address of the attached network's
                Designated Router (which may be the router itself),
                Link Data set to the router's own IP interface
                address, and cost equal to the interface's
                configured output cost.  Otherwise, add a link as if
                the interface state were Waiting (see above).
        12.4.1.3.  Describing virtual links
            For virtual links, a link description is added to the
            router-LSA only when the virtual neighbor is fully
            adjacent. In this case, add a Type 4 link (virtual link)
            with Link ID set to the Router ID of the virtual
            neighbor, Link Data set to the IP interface address
            associated with the virtual link and cost set to the
            cost calculated for the virtual link during the routing
            table calculation (see Section 15).
        12.4.1.4.  Describing Point-to-MultiPoint interfaces
            For operational Point-to-MultiPoint interfaces, one or
            more link descriptions are added to the router-LSA as
            follows:
            o   A single Type 3 link (stub network) is added with
                Link ID set to the router's own IP interface
                address, Link Data set to the mask 0xffffffff
                (indicating a host route), and cost set to 0.
            o   For each fully adjacent neighbor associated with the
                interface, add an additional Type 1 link (point-to-
                point) with Link ID set to the Router ID of the
                neighboring router, Link Data set to the IP
                interface address and cost equal to the interface's
                configured output cost.
        12.4.1.5.  Examples of router-LSAs
            Consider the router-LSAs generated by Router RT3, as
            pictured in Figure 6.  The area containing Router RT3
            (Area 1) has been redrawn, with actual network
            addresses, in Figure 15.  Assume that the last byte of
            all of RT3's interface addresses is 3, giving it the
            interface addresses 192.1.1.3 and 192.1.4.3, and that
            the other routers have similar addressing schemes.  In
            addition, assume that all links are functional, and that
            Router IDs are assigned as the smallest IP interface
            address.
            RT3 originates two router-LSAs, one for Area 1 and one
            for the backbone.  Assume that Router RT4 has been
            selected as the Designated router for network 192.1.1.0.
            RT3's router-LSA for Area 1 is then shown below.  It
            indicates that RT3 has two connections to Area 1, the
            first a link to the transit network 192.1.1.0 and the
            second a link to the stub network 192.1.4.0.  Note that
            the transit network is identified by the IP interface of
            its Designated Router (i.e., the Link ID = 192.1.1.4
            which is the Designated Router RT4's IP interface to
            192.1.1.0).  Note also that RT3 has indicated that it is
            an area border router.
    ; RT3's router-LSA for Area 1
    LS age = 0                     ;always true on origination
    Options = (E-bit)              ;
    LS type = 1                    ;indicates router-LSA
    Link State ID = 192.1.1.3      ;RT3's Router ID
    Advertising Router = 192.1.1.3 ;RT3's Router ID
    bit E = 0                      ;not an AS boundary router
    bit B = 1                      ;area border router
    #links = 2
           Link ID = 192.1.1.4     ;IP address of Desig. Rtr.
           Link Data = 192.1.1.3   ;RT3's IP interface to net
           Type = 2                ;connects to transit network
           # TOS metrics = 0
           metric = 1
           Link ID = 192.1.4.0     ;IP Network number
           Link Data = 0xffffff00  ;Network mask
           Type = 3                ;connects to stub network
           # TOS metrics = 0
           metric = 2
                Next RT3's router-LSA for the backbone is shown.  It
                indicates that RT3 has a single attachment to the
                backbone.  This attachment is via an unnumbered
                point-to-point link to Router RT6.  RT3 has again
                indicated that it is an area border router.
    ; RT3's router-LSA for the backbone
    LS age = 0                     ;always true on origination
    Options = (E-bit)              ;
    LS type = 1                    ;indicates router-LSA
    Link State ID = 192.1.1.3      ;RT3's router ID
    Advertising Router = 192.1.1.3 ;RT3's router ID
    bit E = 0                      ;not an AS boundary router
    bit B = 1                      ;area border router
    #links = 1
           Link ID = 18.10.0.6     ;Neighbor's Router ID
           Link Data = 0.0.0.3     ;MIB-II ifIndex of P-P link
           Type = 1                ;connects to router
           # TOS metrics = 0
           metric = 8
    12.4.2.  Network-LSAs
        A network-LSA is generated for every transit broadcast or
        NBMA network.  (A transit network is a network having two or
        more attached routers).  The network-LSA describes all the
        routers that are attached to the network.
        The Designated Router for the network originates the LSA.
        The Designated Router originates the LSA only if it is fully
        adjacent to at least one other router on the network.  The
        network-LSA is flooded throughout the area that contains the
        transit network, and no further.  The network-LSA lists
        those routers that are fully adjacent to the Designated
        Router; each fully adjacent router is identified by its OSPF
        Router ID.  The Designated Router includes itself in this
        list.
        The Link State ID for a network-LSA is the IP interface
        address of the Designated Router.  This value, masked by the
        network's address mask (which is also contained in the
        network-LSA) yields the network's IP address.
        A router that has formerly been the Designated Router for a
        network, but is no longer, should flush the network-LSA that
        it had previously originated.  This LSA is no longer used in
        the routing table calculation.  It is flushed by prematurely
        incrementing the LSA's age to MaxAge and reflooding (see
        Section 14.1). In addition, in those rare cases where a
        router's Router ID has changed, any network-LSAs that were
        originated with the router's previous Router ID must be
        flushed. Since the router may have no idea what it's
        previous Router ID might have been, these network-LSAs are
        indicated by having their Link State ID equal to one of the
        router's IP interface addresses and their Advertising Router
        equal to some value other than the router's current Router
        ID (see Section 13.4 for more details).
        12.4.2.1.  Examples of network-LSAs
            Again consider the area configuration in Figure 6.
            Network-LSAs are originated for Network N3 in Area 1,
            Networks N6 and N8 in Area 2, and Network N9 in Area 3.
            Assuming that Router RT4 has been selected as the
            Designated Router for Network N3, the following
            network-LSA is generated by RT4 on behalf of Network N3
            (see Figure 15 for the address assignments):
    ; Network-LSA for Network N3
    LS age = 0                     ;always true on origination
    Options = (E-bit)              ;
    LS type = 2                    ;indicates network-LSA
    Link State ID = 192.1.1.4      ;IP address of Desig. Rtr.
    Advertising Router = 192.1.1.4 ;RT4's Router ID
    Network Mask = 0xffffff00
           Attached Router = 192.1.1.4    ;Router ID
           Attached Router = 192.1.1.1    ;Router ID
           Attached Router = 192.1.1.2    ;Router ID
           Attached Router = 192.1.1.3    ;Router ID
    12.4.3.  Summary-LSAs
        The destination described by a summary-LSA is either an IP
        network, an AS boundary router or a range of IP addresses.
        Summary-LSAs are flooded throughout a single area only.  The
        destination described is one that is external to the area,
        yet still belongs to the Autonomous System.
        Summary-LSAs are originated by area border routers.  The
        precise summary routes to advertise into an area are
        determined by examining the routing table structure (see
        Section 11) in accordance with the algorithm described
        below. Note that only intra-area routes are advertised into
        the backbone, while both intra-area and inter-area routes
        are advertised into the other areas.
        To determine which routes to advertise into an attached Area
        A, each routing table entry is processed as follows.
        Remember that each routing table entry describes a set of
        equal-cost best paths to a particular destination:
        o   Only Destination Types of network and AS boundary router
            are advertised in summary-LSAs.  If the routing table
            entry's Destination Type is area border router, examine
            the next routing table entry.
        o   AS external routes are never advertised in summary-LSAs.
            If the routing table entry has Path-type of type 1
            external or type 2 external, examine the next routing
            table entry.
        o   Else, if the area associated with this set of paths is
            the Area A itself, do not generate a summary-LSA for the
            route.[17]
        o   Else, if the next hops associated with this set of paths
            belong to Area A itself, do not generate a summary-LSA
            for the route.[18] This is the logical equivalent of a
            Distance Vector protocol's split horizon logic.
        o   Else, if the routing table cost equals or exceeds the
            value LSInfinity, a summary-LSA cannot be generated for
            this route.
        o   Else, if the destination of this route is an AS boundary
            router, a summary-LSA should be originated if and only
            if the routing table entry describes the preferred path
            to the AS boundary router (see Step 3 of Section 16.4).
            If so, a Type 4 summary-LSA is originated for the
            destination, with Link State ID equal to the AS boundary
            router's Router ID and metric equal to the routing table
            entry's cost. Note: these LSAs should not be generated
            if Area A has been configured as a stub area.
        o   Else, the Destination type is network. If this is an
            inter-area route, generate a Type 3 summary-LSA for the
            destination, with Link State ID equal to the network's
            address (if necessary, the Link State ID can also have
            one or more of the network's host bits set; see Appendix
            E for details) and metric equal to the routing table
            cost.
        o   The one remaining case is an intra-area route to a
            network.  This means that the network is contained in
            one of the router's directly attached areas.  In
            general, this information must be condensed before
            appearing in summary-LSAs.  Remember that an area has a
            configured list of address ranges, each range consisting
            of an [address,mask] pair and a status indication of
            either Advertise or DoNotAdvertise.  At most a single
            Type 3 summary-LSA is originated for each range. When
            the range's status indicates Advertise, a Type 3
            summary-LSA is generated with Link State ID equal to the
            range's address (if necessary, the Link State ID can
            also have one or more of the range's "host" bits set;
            see Appendix E for details) and cost equal to the
            largest cost of any of the component networks. When the
            range's status indicates DoNotAdvertise, the Type 3
            summary-LSA is suppressed and the component networks
            remain hidden from other areas.
            By default, if a network is not contained in any
            explicitly configured address range, a Type 3 summary-
            LSA is generated with Link State ID equal to the
            network's address (if necessary, the Link State ID can
            also have one or more of the network's "host" bits set;
            see Appendix E for details) and metric equal to the
            network's routing table cost.
            If an area is capable of carrying transit traffic (i.e.,
            its TransitCapability is set to TRUE), routing
            information concerning backbone networks should not be
            condensed before being summarized into the area.  Nor
            should the advertisement of backbone networks into
            transit areas be suppressed.  In other words, the
            backbone's configured ranges should be ignored when
            originating summary-LSAs into transit areas.
        If a router advertises a summary-LSA for a destination which
        then becomes unreachable, the router must then flush the LSA
        from the routing domain by setting its age to MaxAge and
        reflooding (see Section 14.1).  Also, if the destination is
        still reachable, yet can no longer be advertised according
        to the above procedure (e.g., it is now an inter-area route,
        when it used to be an intra-area route associated with some
        non-backbone area; it would thus no longer be advertisable
        to the backbone), the LSA should also be flushed from the
        routing domain.
        12.4.3.1.  Originating summary-LSAs into stub areas
            The algorithm in Section 12.4.3 is optional when Area A
            is an OSPF stub area. Area border routers connecting to
            a stub area can originate summary-LSAs into the area
            according to the Section 12.4.3's algorithm, or can
            choose to originate only a subset of the summary-LSAs,
            possibly under configuration control.  The fewer LSAs
            originated, the smaller the stub area's link state
            database, further reducing the demands on its routers'
            resources. However, omitting LSAs may also lead to sub-
            optimal inter-area routing, although routing will
            continue to function.
            As specified in Section 12.4.3, Type 4 summary-LSAs
            (ASBR-summary-LSAs) are never originated into stub
            areas.
            In a stub area, instead of importing external routes
            each area border router originates a "default summary-
            LSA" into the area. The Link State ID for the default
            summary-LSA is set to DefaultDestination, and the metric
            set to the (per-area) configurable parameter
            StubDefaultCost.  Note that StubDefaultCost need not be
            configured identically in all of the stub area's area
            border routers.
        12.4.3.2.  Examples of summary-LSAs
            Consider again the area configuration in Figure 6.
            Routers RT3, RT4, RT7, RT10 and RT11 are all area border
            routers, and therefore are originating summary-LSAs.
            Consider in particular Router RT4.  Its routing table
            was calculated as the example in Section 11.3.  RT4
            originates summary-LSAs into both the backbone and Area
            1.  Into the backbone, Router RT4 originates separate
            LSAs for each of the networks N1-N4.  Into Area 1,
            Router RT4 originates separate LSAs for networks N6-N8
            and the AS boundary routers RT5,RT7.  It also condenses
            host routes Ia and Ib into a single summary-LSA.
            Finally, the routes to networks N9,N10,N11 and Host H1
            are advertised by a single summary-LSA.  This
            condensation was originally performed by the router
            RT11.
            These LSAs are illustrated graphically in Figures 7 and
            8.  Two of the summary-LSAs originated by Router RT4
            follow.  The actual IP addresses for the networks and
            routers in question have been assigned in Figure 15.
    ; Summary-LSA for Network N1,
    ; originated by Router RT4 into the backbone
    LS age = 0                  ;always true on origination
    Options = (E-bit)           ;
    LS type = 3                 ;Type 3 summary-LSA
    Link State ID = 192.1.2.0   ;N1's IP network number
    Advertising Router = 192.1.1.4       ;RT4's ID
    metric = 4
    ; Summary-LSA for AS boundary router RT7
    ; originated by Router RT4 into Area 1
    LS age = 0                  ;always true on origination
    Options = (E-bit)           ;
    LS type = 4                 ;Type 4 summary-LSA
    Link State ID = Router RT7's ID
    Advertising Router = 192.1.1.4       ;RT4's ID
    metric = 14
    12.4.4.  AS-external-LSAs
        AS-external-LSAs describe routes to destinations external to
        the Autonomous System.  Most AS-external-LSAs describe
        routes to specific external destinations; in these cases the
        LSA's Link State ID is set to the destination network's IP
        address (if necessary, the Link State ID can also have one
        or more of the network's "host" bits set; see Appendix E for
        details).  However, a default route for the Autonomous
        System can be described in an AS-external-LSA by setting the
        LSA's Link State ID to DefaultDestination (0.0.0.0).  AS-
        external-LSAs are originated by AS boundary routers.  An AS
        boundary router originates a single AS-external-LSA for each
        external route that it has learned, either through another
        routing protocol (such as BGP), or through configuration
        information.
        AS-external-LSAs are the only type of LSAs that are flooded
        throughout the entire Autonomous System; all other types of
        LSAs are specific to a single area.  However, AS-external-
        LSAs are not flooded into/throughout stub areas (see Section
        3.6).  This enables a reduction in link state database size
        for routers internal to stub areas.
        The metric that is advertised for an external route can be
        one of two types.  Type 1 metrics are comparable to the link
        state metric.  Type 2 metrics are assumed to be larger than
        the cost of any intra-AS path.
        If a router advertises an AS-external-LSA for a destination
        which then becomes unreachable, the router must then flush
        the LSA from the routing domain by setting its age to MaxAge
        and reflooding (see Section 14.1).
        12.4.4.1.  Examples of AS-external-LSAs
            Consider once again the AS pictured in Figure 6.  There
            are two AS boundary routers: RT5 and RT7.  Router RT5
            originates three AS-external-LSAs, for networks N12-N14.
            Router RT7 originates two AS-external-LSAs, for networks
            N12 and N15.  Assume that RT7 has learned its route to
            N12 via BGP, and that it wishes to advertise a Type 2
            metric to the AS.  RT7 would then originate the
            following LSA for N12:
    ; AS-external-LSA for Network N12,
    ; originated by Router RT7
    LS age = 0                  ;always true on origination
    Options = (E-bit)           ;
    LS type = 5                 ;AS-external-LSA
    Link State ID = N12's IP network number
    Advertising Router = Router RT7's ID
    bit E = 1                   ;Type 2 metric
    metric = 2
    Forwarding address = 0.0.0.0
                In the above example, the forwarding address field
                has been set to 0.0.0.0, indicating that packets for
                the external destination should be forwarded to the
                advertising OSPF router (RT7).  This is not always
                desirable.  Consider the example pictured in Figure
                16.  There are three OSPF routers (RTA, RTB and RTC)
                connected to a common network.  Only one of these
                routers, RTA, is exchanging BGP information with the
                non-OSPF router RTX.  RTA must then originate AS-
                external-LSAs for those destinations it has learned
                from RTX.  By using the AS-external-LSA's forwarding
                address field, RTA can specify that packets for
                these destinations be forwarded directly to RTX.
                Without this feature, Routers RTB and RTC would take
                an extra hop to get to these destinations.
                Note that when the forwarding address field is non-
                zero, it should point to a router belonging to
                another Autonomous System.
                A forwarding address can also be specified for the
                default route.  For example, in figure 16 RTA may
                want to specify that all externally-destined packets
                should by default be forwarded to its BGP peer RTX.
                The resulting AS-external-LSA is pictured below.
                Note that the Link State ID is set to
                DefaultDestination.
    ; Default route, originated by Router RTA
    ; Packets forwarded through RTX
    LS age = 0                  ;always true on origination
    Options = (E-bit)           ;
    LS type = 5                 ;AS-external-LSA
    Link State ID = DefaultDestination  ; default route
    Advertising Router = Router RTA's ID
    bit E = 1                   ;Type 2 metric
    metric = 1
    Forwarding address = RTX's IP address
                In figure 16, suppose instead that both RTA and RTB
                exchange BGP information with RTX.  In this case,
                RTA and RTB would originate the same set of AS-
                external-LSAs.  These LSAs, if they specify the same
                metric, would be functionally equivalent since they
                would specify the same destination and forwarding
                address (RTX).  This leads to a clear duplication of
                effort.  If only one of RTA or RTB originated the
                set of AS-external-LSAs, the routing would remain
                the same, and the size of the link state database
                would decrease.  However, it must be unambiguously
                defined as to which router originates the LSAs
                (otherwise neither may, or the identity of the
                originator may oscillate).  The following rule is
                thereby established: if two routers, both reachable
                from one another, originate functionally equivalent
                AS-external-LSAs (i.e., same destination, cost and
                non-zero forwarding address), then the LSA
                originated by the router having the highest OSPF
                Router ID is used.  The router having the lower OSPF
                Router ID can then flush its LSA.  Flushing an LSA
                is discussed in Section 14.1.
                            +
                            |
                  +---+     |-----|RTX|
                            |     +---+
                  +---+     |
                  |RTB|-----|
                  +---+     |
                            |
                  +---+     |
                  |RTC|-----|
                  +---+     |
                            |
                            +
           Figure 16: Forwarding address example

13. The Flooding Procedure

Link State Update packets provide the mechanism for flooding LSAs.
A Link State Update packet may contain several distinct LSAs, and
floods each LSA one hop further from its point of origination.  To
make the flooding procedure reliable, each LSA must be acknowledged
separately.  Acknowledgments are transmitted in Link State
Acknowledgment packets.  Many separate acknowledgments can also be
grouped together into a single packet.
The flooding procedure starts when a Link State Update packet has
been received.  Many consistency checks have been made on the
received packet before being handed to the flooding procedure (see
Section 8.2).  In particular, the Link State Update packet has been
associated with a particular neighbor, and a particular area.  If
the neighbor is in a lesser state than Exchange, the packet should
be dropped without further processing.
All types of LSAs, other than AS-external-LSAs, are associated with
a specific area.  However, LSAs do not contain an area field.  An
LSA's area must be deduced from the Link State Update packet header.
For each LSA contained in a Link State Update packet, the following
steps are taken:
(1) Validate the LSA's LS checksum.  If the checksum turns out to be
    invalid, discard the LSA and get the next one from the Link
    State Update packet.
(2) Examine the LSA's LS type.  If the LS type is unknown, discard
    the LSA and get the next one from the Link State Update Packet.
    This specification defines LS types 1-5 (see Section 4.3).
(3) Else if this is an AS-external-LSA (LS type = 5), and the area
    has been configured as a stub area, discard the LSA and get the
    next one from the Link State Update Packet.  AS-external-LSAs
    are not flooded into/throughout stub areas (see Section 3.6).
(4) Else if the LSA's LS age is equal to MaxAge, and there is
    currently no instance of the LSA in the router's link state
    database, and none of router's neighbors are in states Exchange
    or Loading, then take the following actions: a) Acknowledge the
    receipt of the LSA by sending a Link State Acknowledgment packet
    back to the sending neighbor (see Section 13.5), and b) Discard
    the LSA and examine the next LSA (if any) listed in the Link
    State Update packet.
(5) Otherwise, find the instance of this LSA that is currently
    contained in the router's link state database.  If there is no
    database copy, or the received LSA is more recent than the
    database copy (see Section 13.1 below for the determination of
    which LSA is more recent) the following steps must be performed:
    (a) If there is already a database copy, and if the database
        copy was received via flooding and installed less than
        MinLSArrival seconds ago, discard the new LSA (without
        acknowledging it) and examine the next LSA (if any) listed
        in the Link State Update packet.
    (b) Otherwise immediately flood the new LSA out some subset of
        the router's interfaces (see Section 13.3).  In some cases
        (e.g., the state of the receiving interface is DR and the
        LSA was received from a router other than the Backup DR) the
        LSA will be flooded back out the receiving interface.  This
        occurrence should be noted for later use by the
        acknowledgment process (Section 13.5).
    (c) Remove the current database copy from all neighbors' Link
        state retransmission lists.
    (d) Install the new LSA in the link state database (replacing
        the current database copy).  This may cause the routing
        table calculation to be scheduled.  In addition, timestamp
        the new LSA with the current time (i.e., the time it was
        received).  The flooding procedure cannot overwrite the
        newly installed LSA until MinLSArrival seconds have elapsed.
        The LSA installation process is discussed further in Section
        13.2.
    (e) Possibly acknowledge the receipt of the LSA by sending a
        Link State Acknowledgment packet back out the receiving
        interface.  This is explained below in Section 13.5.
    (f) If this new LSA indicates that it was originated by the
        receiving router itself (i.e., is considered a self-
        originated LSA), the router must take special action, either
        updating the LSA or in some cases flushing it from the
        routing domain. For a description of how self-originated
        LSAs are detected and subsequently handled, see Section
        13.4.
(6) Else, if there is an instance of the LSA on the sending
    neighbor's Link state request list, an error has occurred in the
    Database Exchange process.  In this case, restart the Database
    Exchange process by generating the neighbor event BadLSReq for
    the sending neighbor and stop processing the Link State Update
    packet.
(7) Else, if the received LSA is the same instance as the database
    copy (i.e., neither one is more recent) the following two steps
    should be performed:
    (a) If the LSA is listed in the Link state retransmission list
        for the receiving adjacency, the router itself is expecting
        an acknowledgment for this LSA.  The router should treat the
        received LSA as an acknowledgment by removing the LSA from
        the Link state retransmission list.  This is termed an
        "implied acknowledgment".  Its occurrence should be noted
        for later use by the acknowledgment process (Section 13.5).
    (b) Possibly acknowledge the receipt of the LSA by sending a
        Link State Acknowledgment packet back out the receiving
        interface.  This is explained below in Section 13.5.
(8) Else, the database copy is more recent.  If the database copy
    has LS age equal to MaxAge and LS sequence number equal to
    MaxSequenceNumber, simply discard the received LSA without
    acknowledging it. (In this case, the LSA's LS sequence number is
    wrapping, and the MaxSequenceNumber LSA must be completely
    flushed before any new LSA instance can be introduced).
    Otherwise, as long as the database copy has not been sent in a
    Link State Update within the last MinLSArrival seconds, send the
    database copy back to the sending neighbor, encapsulated within
    a Link State Update Packet. The Link State Update Packet should
    be sent directly to the neighbor. In so doing, do not put the
    database copy of the LSA on the neighbor's link state
    retransmission list, and do not acknowledge the received (less
    recent) LSA instance.
13.1.  Determining which LSA is newer
    When a router encounters two instances of an LSA, it must
    determine which is more recent.  This occurred above when
    comparing a received LSA to its database copy.  This comparison
    must also be done during the Database Exchange procedure which
    occurs during adjacency bring-up.
    An LSA is identified by its LS type, Link State ID and
    Advertising Router.  For two instances of the same LSA, the LS
    sequence number, LS age, and LS checksum fields are used to
    determine which instance is more recent:
    o   The LSA having the newer LS sequence number is more recent.
        See Section 12.1.6 for an explanation of the LS sequence
        number space.  If both instances have the same LS sequence
        number, then:
    o   If the two instances have different LS checksums, then the
        instance having the larger LS checksum (when considered as a
        16-bit unsigned integer) is considered more recent.
    o   Else, if only one of the instances has its LS age field set
        to MaxAge, the instance of age MaxAge is considered to be
        more recent.
    o   Else, if the LS age fields of the two instances differ by
        more than MaxAgeDiff, the instance having the smaller
        (younger) LS age is considered to be more recent.
    o   Else, the two instances are considered to be identical.
13.2.  Installing LSAs in the database
    Installing a new LSA in the database, either as the result of
    flooding or a newly self-originated LSA, may cause the OSPF
    routing table structure to be recalculated.  The contents of the
    new LSA should be compared to the old instance, if present.  If
    there is no difference, there is no need to recalculate the
    routing table. When comparing an LSA to its previous instance,
    the following are all considered to be differences in contents:
        o   The LSA's Options field has changed.
        o   One of the LSA instances has LS age set to MaxAge, and
            the other does not.
        o   The length field in the LSA header has changed.
        o   The body of the LSA (i.e., anything outside the 20-byte
            LSA header) has changed. Note that this excludes changes
            in LS Sequence Number and LS Checksum.
    If the contents are different, the following pieces of the
    routing table must be recalculated, depending on the new LSA's
    LS type field:
    Router-LSAs and network-LSAs
        The entire routing table must be recalculated, starting with
        the shortest path calculations for each area (not just the
        area whose link-state database has changed).  The reason
        that the shortest path calculation cannot be restricted to
        the single changed area has to do with the fact that AS
        boundary routers may belong to multiple areas.  A change in
        the area currently providing the best route may force the
        router to use an intra-area route provided by a different
        area.[19]
    Summary-LSAs
        The best route to the destination described by the summary-
        LSA must be recalculated (see Section 16.5).  If this
        destination is an AS boundary router, it may also be
        necessary to re-examine all the AS-external-LSAs.
    AS-external-LSAs
        The best route to the destination described by the AS-
        external-LSA must be recalculated (see Section 16.6).
    Also, any old instance of the LSA must be removed from the
    database when the new LSA is installed.  This old instance must
    also be removed from all neighbors' Link state retransmission
    lists (see Section 10).
13.3.  Next step in the flooding procedure
    When a new (and more recent) LSA has been received, it must be
    flooded out some set of the router's interfaces.  This section
    describes the second part of flooding procedure (the first part
    being the processing that occurred in Section 13), namely,
    selecting the outgoing interfaces and adding the LSA to the
    appropriate neighbors' Link state retransmission lists.  Also
    included in this part of the flooding procedure is the
    maintenance of the neighbors' Link state request lists.
    This section is equally applicable to the flooding of an LSA
    that the router itself has just originated (see Section 12.4).
    For these LSAs, this section provides the entirety of the
    flooding procedure (i.e., the processing of Section 13 is not
    performed, since, for example, the LSA has not been received
    from a neighbor and therefore does not need to be acknowledged).
    Depending upon the LSA's LS type, the LSA can be flooded out
    only certain interfaces.  These interfaces, defined by the
    following, are called the eligible interfaces:
    AS-external-LSAs (LS Type = 5)
        AS-external-LSAs are flooded throughout the entire AS, with
        the exception of stub areas (see Section 3.6).  The eligible
        interfaces are all the router's interfaces, excluding
        virtual links and those interfaces attaching to stub areas.
    All other LS types
        All other types are specific to a single area (Area A).  The
        eligible interfaces are all those interfaces attaching to
        the Area A.  If Area A is the backbone, this includes all
        the virtual links.
    Link state databases must remain synchronized over all
    adjacencies associated with the above eligible interfaces.  This
    is accomplished by executing the following steps on each
    eligible interface.  It should be noted that this procedure may
    decide not to flood an LSA out a particular interface, if there
    is a high probability that the attached neighbors have already
    received the LSA.  However, in these cases the flooding
    procedure must be absolutely sure that the neighbors eventually
    do receive the LSA, so the LSA is still added to each
    adjacency's Link state retransmission list.  For each eligible
    interface:
    (1) Each of the neighbors attached to this interface are
        examined, to determine whether they must receive the new
        LSA.  The following steps are executed for each neighbor:
        (a) If the neighbor is in a lesser state than Exchange, it
            does not participate in flooding, and the next neighbor
            should be examined.
        (b) Else, if the adjacency is not yet full (neighbor state
            is Exchange or Loading), examine the Link state request
            list associated with this adjacency.  If there is an
            instance of the new LSA on the list, it indicates that
            the neighboring router has an instance of the LSA
            already.  Compare the new LSA to the neighbor's copy:
            o   If the new LSA is less recent, then examine the next
                neighbor.
            o   If the two copies are the same instance, then delete
                the LSA from the Link state request list, and
                examine the next neighbor.[20]
            o   Else, the new LSA is more recent.  Delete the LSA
                from the Link state request list.
        (c) If the new LSA was received from this neighbor, examine
            the next neighbor.
        (d) At this point we are not positive that the neighbor has
            an up-to-date instance of this new LSA.  Add the new LSA
            to the Link state retransmission list for the adjacency.
            This ensures that the flooding procedure is reliable;
            the LSA will be retransmitted at intervals until an
            acknowledgment is seen from the neighbor.
    (2) The router must now decide whether to flood the new LSA out
        this interface.  If in the previous step, the LSA was NOT
        added to any of the Link state retransmission lists, there
        is no need to flood the LSA out the interface and the next
        interface should be examined.
    (3) If the new LSA was received on this interface, and it was
        received from either the Designated Router or the Backup
        Designated Router, chances are that all the neighbors have
        received the LSA already.  Therefore, examine the next
        interface.
    (4) If the new LSA was received on this interface, and the
        interface state is Backup (i.e., the router itself is the
        Backup Designated Router), examine the next interface.  The
        Designated Router will do the flooding on this interface.
        However, if the Designated Router fails the router (i.e.,
        the Backup Designated Router) will end up retransmitting the
        updates.
    (5) If this step is reached, the LSA must be flooded out the
        interface.  Send a Link State Update packet (including the
        new LSA as contents) out the interface.  The LSA's LS age
        must be incremented by InfTransDelay (which must be > 0)
        when it is copied into the outgoing Link State Update packet
        (until the LS age field reaches the maximum value of
        MaxAge).
        On broadcast networks, the Link State Update packets are
        multicast.  The destination IP address specified for the
        Link State Update Packet depends on the state of the
        interface.  If the interface state is DR or Backup, the
        address AllSPFRouters should be used.  Otherwise, the
        address AllDRouters should be used.
        On non-broadcast networks, separate Link State Update
        packets must be sent, as unicasts, to each adjacent neighbor
        (i.e., those in state Exchange or greater).  The destination
        IP addresses for these packets are the neighbors' IP
        addresses.
13.4.  Receiving self-originated LSAs
    It is a common occurrence for a router to receive self-
    originated LSAs via the flooding procedure. A self-originated
    LSA is detected when either 1) the LSA's Advertising Router is
    equal to the router's own Router ID or 2) the LSA is a network-
    LSA and its Link State ID is equal to one of the router's own IP
    interface addresses.
    However, if the received self-originated LSA is newer than the
    last instance that the router actually originated, the router
    must take special action.  The reception of such an LSA
    indicates that there are LSAs in the routing domain that were
    originated by the router before the last time it was restarted.
    In most cases, the router must then advance the LSA's LS
    sequence number one past the received LS sequence number, and
    originate a new instance of the LSA.
    It may be the case the router no longer wishes to originate the
    received LSA. Possible examples include: 1) the LSA is a
    summary-LSA or AS-external-LSA and the router no longer has an
    (advertisable) route to the destination, 2) the LSA is a
    network-LSA but the router is no longer Designated Router for
    the network or 3) the LSA is a network-LSA whose Link State ID
    is one of the router's own IP interface addresses but whose
    Advertising Router is not equal to the router's own Router ID
    (this latter case should be rare, and it indicates that the
    router's Router ID has changed since originating the LSA).  In
    all these cases, instead of updating the LSA, the LSA should be
    flushed from the routing domain by incrementing the received
    LSA's LS age to MaxAge and reflooding (see Section 14.1).
13.5.  Sending Link State Acknowledgment packets
    Each newly received LSA must be acknowledged.  This is usually
    done by sending Link State Acknowledgment packets.  However,
    acknowledgments can also be accomplished implicitly by sending
    Link State Update packets (see step 7a of Section 13).
    Many acknowledgments may be grouped together into a single Link
    State Acknowledgment packet.  Such a packet is sent back out the
    interface which received the LSAs.  The packet can be sent in
    one of two ways: delayed and sent on an interval timer, or sent
    directly to a particular neighbor.  The particular
    acknowledgment strategy used depends on the circumstances
    surrounding the receipt of the LSA.
    Sending delayed acknowledgments accomplishes several things: 1)
    it facilitates the packaging of multiple acknowledgments in a
    single Link State Acknowledgment packet, 2) it enables a single
    Link State Acknowledgment packet to indicate acknowledgments to
    several neighbors at once (through multicasting) and 3) it
    randomizes the Link State Acknowledgment packets sent by the
    various routers attached to a common network.  The fixed
    interval between a router's delayed transmissions must be short
    (less than RxmtInterval) or needless retransmissions will ensue.
    Direct acknowledgments are sent directly to a particular
    neighbor in response to the receipt of duplicate LSAs. Direct
    acknowledgments are sent immediately when the duplicate is
    received. On multi-access networks, these acknowledgments are
    sent directly to the neighbor's IP address.
    The precise procedure for sending Link State Acknowledgment
    packets is described in Table 19.  The circumstances surrounding
    the receipt of the LSA are listed in the left column.  The
    acknowledgment action then taken is listed in one of the two
    right columns.  This action depends on the state of the
    concerned interface; interfaces in state Backup behave
    differently from interfaces in all other states.  Delayed
    acknowledgments must be delivered to all adjacent routers
    associated with the interface.  On broadcast networks, this is
    accomplished by sending the delayed Link State Acknowledgment
    packets as multicasts.  The Destination IP address used depends
                                 Action taken in state

Circumstances Backup All other states _________________________________________________________________ LSA has No acknowledgment No acknowledgment been flooded back sent. sent. out receiving in- terface (see Sec- tion 13, step 5b). _________________________________________________________________ LSA is Delayed acknowledg- Delayed ack- more recent than ment sent if adver- nowledgment sent. database copy, but tisement received was not flooded from Designated back out receiving Router, otherwise interface do nothing _________________________________________________________________ LSA is a Delayed acknowledg- No acknowledgment duplicate, and was ment sent if adver- sent. treated as an im- tisement received plied acknowledg- from Designated ment (see Section Router, otherwise 13, step 7a). do nothing _________________________________________________________________ LSA is a Direct acknowledg- Direct acknowledg- duplicate, and was ment sent. ment sent. not treated as an implied ack- nowledgment. _________________________________________________________________ LSA's LS Direct acknowledg- Direct acknowledg- age is equal to ment sent. ment sent. MaxAge, and there is no current instance of the LSA in the link state database, and none of router's neighbors are in states Exchange

or Loading (see Section 13, step 4).

         Table 19: Sending link state acknowledgements.
    on the state of the interface.  If the interface state is DR or
    Backup, the destination AllSPFRouters is used.  In all other
    states, the destination AllDRouters is used.  On non-broadcast
    networks, delayed Link State Acknowledgment packets must be
    unicast separately over each adjacency (i.e., neighbor whose
    state is >= Exchange).
    The reasoning behind sending the above packets as multicasts is
    best explained by an example.  Consider the network
    configuration depicted in Figure 15.  Suppose RT4 has been
    elected as Designated Router, and RT3 as Backup Designated
    Router for the network N3.  When Router RT4 floods a new LSA to
    Network N3, it is received by routers RT1, RT2, and RT3.  These
    routers will not flood the LSA back onto net N3, but they still
    must ensure that their link-state databases remain synchronized
    with their adjacent neighbors.  So RT1, RT2, and RT4 are waiting
    to see an acknowledgment from RT3.  Likewise, RT4 and RT3 are
    both waiting to see acknowledgments from RT1 and RT2.  This is
    best achieved by sending the acknowledgments as multicasts.
    The reason that the acknowledgment logic for Backup DRs is
    slightly different is because they perform differently during
    the flooding of LSAs (see Section 13.3, step 4).
13.6.  Retransmitting LSAs
    LSAs flooded out an adjacency are placed on the adjacency's Link
    state retransmission list.  In order to ensure that flooding is
    reliable, these LSAs are retransmitted until they are
    acknowledged.  The length of time between retransmissions is a
    configurable per-interface value, RxmtInterval.  If this is set
    too low for an interface, needless retransmissions will ensue.
    If the value is set too high, the speed of the flooding, in the
    face of lost packets, may be affected.
    Several retransmitted LSAs may fit into a single Link State
    Update packet.  When LSAs are to be retransmitted, only the
    number fitting in a single Link State Update packet should be
    sent.  Another packet of retransmissions can be sent whenever
    some of the LSAs are acknowledged, or on the next firing of the
    retransmission timer.
    Link State Update Packets carrying retransmissions are always
    sent directly to the neighbor. On multi-access networks, this
    means that retransmissions are sent directly to the neighbor's
    IP address.  Each LSA's LS age must be incremented by
    InfTransDelay (which must be > 0) when it is copied into the
    outgoing Link State Update packet (until the LS age field
    reaches the maximum value of MaxAge).
    If an adjacent router goes down, retransmissions may occur until
    the adjacency is destroyed by OSPF's Hello Protocol.  When the
    adjacency is destroyed, the Link state retransmission list is
    cleared.
13.7.  Receiving link state acknowledgments
    Many consistency checks have been made on a received Link State
    Acknowledgment packet before it is handed to the flooding
    procedure.  In particular, it has been associated with a
    particular neighbor.  If this neighbor is in a lesser state than
    Exchange, the Link State Acknowledgment packet is discarded.
    Otherwise, for each acknowledgment in the Link State
    Acknowledgment packet, the following steps are performed:
    o   Does the LSA acknowledged have an instance on the Link state
        retransmission list for the neighbor?  If not, examine the
        next acknowledgment.  Otherwise:
    o   If the acknowledgment is for the same instance that is
        contained on the list, remove the item from the list and
        examine the next acknowledgment.  Otherwise:
    o   Log the questionable acknowledgment, and examine the next
        one.

14. Aging The Link State Database

Each LSA has an LS age field.  The LS age is expressed in seconds.
An LSA's LS age field is incremented while it is contained in a
router's database.  Also, when copied into a Link State Update
Packet for flooding out a particular interface, the LSA's LS age is
incremented by InfTransDelay.
An LSA's LS age is never incremented past the value MaxAge.  LSAs
having age MaxAge are not used in the routing table calculation.  As
a router ages its link state database, an LSA's LS age may reach
MaxAge.[21] At this time, the router must attempt to flush the LSA
from the routing domain.  This is done simply by reflooding the
MaxAge LSA just as if it was a newly originated LSA (see Section
13.3).
When creating a Database summary list for a newly forming adjacency,
any MaxAge LSAs present in the link state database are added to the
neighbor's Link state retransmission list instead of the neighbor's
Database summary list.  See Section 10.3 for more details.
A MaxAge LSA must be removed immediately from the router's link
state database as soon as both a) it is no longer contained on any
neighbor Link state retransmission lists and b) none of the router's
neighbors are in states Exchange or Loading.
When, in the process of aging the link state database, an LSA's LS
age hits a multiple of CheckAge, its LS checksum should be verified.
If the LS checksum is incorrect, a program or memory error has been
detected, and at the very least the router itself should be
restarted.
14.1.  Premature aging of LSAs
    An LSA can be flushed from the routing domain by setting its LS
    age to MaxAge, while leaving its LS sequence number alone, and
    then reflooding the LSA.  This procedure follows the same course
    as flushing an LSA whose LS age has naturally reached the value
    MaxAge (see Section 14).  In particular, the MaxAge LSA is
    removed from the router's link state database as soon as a) it
    is no longer contained on any neighbor Link state retransmission
    lists and b) none of the router's neighbors are in states
    Exchange or Loading.  We call the setting of an LSA's LS age to
    MaxAge "premature aging".
    Premature aging is used when it is time for a self-originated
    LSA's sequence number field to wrap.  At this point, the current
    LSA instance (having LS sequence number MaxSequenceNumber) must
    be prematurely aged and flushed from the routing domain before a
    new instance with sequence number equal to InitialSequenceNumber
    can be originated.  See Section 12.1.6 for more information.
    Premature aging can also be used when, for example, one of the
    router's previously advertised external routes is no longer
    reachable.  In this circumstance, the router can flush its AS-
    external-LSA from the routing domain via premature aging. This
    procedure is preferable to the alternative, which is to
    originate a new LSA for the destination specifying a metric of
    LSInfinity.  Premature aging is also be used when unexpectedly
    receiving self-originated LSAs during the flooding procedure
    (see Section 13.4).
    A router may only prematurely age its own self-originated LSAs.
    The router may not prematurely age LSAs that have been
    originated by other routers. An LSA is considered self-
    originated when either 1) the LSA's Advertising Router is equal
    to the router's own Router ID or 2) the LSA is a network-LSA and
    its Link State ID is equal to one of the router's own IP
    interface addresses.

15. Virtual Links

The single backbone area (Area ID = 0.0.0.0) cannot be disconnected,
or some areas of the Autonomous System will become unreachable.  To
establish/maintain connectivity of the backbone, virtual links can
be configured through non-backbone areas.  Virtual links serve to
connect physically separate components of the backbone.  The two
endpoints of a virtual link are area border routers.  The virtual
link must be configured in both routers.  The configuration
information in each router consists of the other virtual endpoint
(the other area border router), and the non-backbone area the two
routers have in common (called the Transit area).  Virtual links
cannot be configured through stub areas (see Section 3.6).
The virtual link is treated as if it were an unnumbered point-to-
point network belonging to the backbone and joining the two area
border routers.  An attempt is made to establish an adjacency over
the virtual link.  When this adjacency is established, the virtual
link will be included in backbone router-LSAs, and OSPF packets
pertaining to the backbone area will flow over the adjacency.  Such
an adjacency has been referred to in this document as a "virtual
adjacency".
In each endpoint router, the cost and viability of the virtual link
is discovered by examining the routing table entry for the other
endpoint router.  (The entry's associated area must be the
configured Transit area).  This is called the virtual link's
corresponding routing table entry.  The InterfaceUp event occurs for
a virtual link when its corresponding routing table entry becomes
reachable.  Conversely, the InterfaceDown event occurs when its
routing table entry becomes unreachable.  In other words, the
virtual link's viability is determined by the existence of an
intra-area path, through the Transit area, between the two
endpoints.  Note that a virtual link whose underlying path has cost
greater than hexadecimal 0xffff (the maximum size of an interface
cost in a router-LSA) should be considered inoperational (i.e.,
treated the same as if the path did not exist).
The other details concerning virtual links are as follows:
o   AS-external-LSAs are NEVER flooded over virtual adjacencies.
    This would be duplication of effort, since the same AS-
    external-LSAs are already flooded throughout the virtual link's
    Transit area.  For this same reason, AS-external-LSAs are not
    summarized over virtual adjacencies during the Database Exchange
    process.
o   The cost of a virtual link is NOT configured.  It is defined to
    be the cost of the intra-area path between the two defining area
    border routers.  This cost appears in the virtual link's
    corresponding routing table entry.  When the cost of a virtual
    link changes, a new router-LSA should be originated for the
    backbone area.
o   Just as the virtual link's cost and viability are determined by
    the routing table build process (through construction of the
    routing table entry for the other endpoint), so are the IP
    interface address for the virtual interface and the virtual
    neighbor's IP address.  These are used when sending OSPF
    protocol packets over the virtual link. Note that when one (or
    both) of the virtual link endpoints connect to the Transit area
    via an unnumbered point-to-point link, it may be impossible to
    calculate either the virtual interface's IP address and/or the
    virtual neighbor's IP address, thereby causing the virtual link
    to fail.
o   In each endpoint's router-LSA for the backbone, the virtual link
    is represented as a Type 4 link whose Link ID is set to the
    virtual neighbor's OSPF Router ID and whose Link Data is set to
    the virtual interface's IP address.  See Section 12.4.1 for more
    information.
o   A non-backbone area can carry transit data traffic (i.e., is
    considered a "transit area") if and only if it serves as the
    Transit area for one or more fully adjacent virtual links (see
    TransitCapability in Sections 6 and 16.1). Such an area requires
    special treatment when summarizing backbone networks into it
    (see Section 12.4.3), and during the routing calculation (see
    Section 16.3).
o   The time between link state retransmissions, RxmtInterval, is
    configured for a virtual link.  This should be well over the
    expected round-trip delay between the two routers.  This may be
    hard to estimate for a virtual link; it is better to err on the
    side of making it too large.

16. Calculation of the routing table

This section details the OSPF routing table calculation.  Using its
attached areas' link state databases as input, a router runs the
following algorithm, building its routing table step by step.  At
each step, the router must access individual pieces of the link
state databases (e.g., a router-LSA originated by a certain router).
This access is performed by the lookup function discussed in Section
12.2.  The lookup process may return an LSA whose LS age is equal to
MaxAge.  Such an LSA should not be used in the routing table
calculation, and is treated just as if the lookup process had
failed.
The OSPF routing table's organization is explained in Section 11.
Two examples of the routing table build process are presented in
Sections 11.2 and 11.3.  This process can be broken into the
following steps:
(1) The present routing table is invalidated.  The routing table is
    built again from scratch.  The old routing table is saved so
    that changes in routing table entries can be identified.
(2) The intra-area routes are calculated by building the shortest-
    path tree for each attached area.  In particular, all routing
    table entries whose Destination Type is "area border router" are
    calculated in this step.  This step is described in two parts.
    At first the tree is constructed by only considering those links
    between routers and transit networks.  Then the stub networks
    are incorporated into the tree. During the area's shortest-path
    tree calculation, the area's TransitCapability is also
    calculated for later use in Step 4.
(3) The inter-area routes are calculated, through examination of
    summary-LSAs.  If the router is attached to multiple areas
    (i.e., it is an area border router), only backbone summary-LSAs
    are examined.
(4) In area border routers connecting to one or more transit areas
    (i.e, non-backbone areas whose TransitCapability is found to be
    TRUE), the transit areas' summary-LSAs are examined to see
    whether better paths exist using the transit areas than were
    found in Steps 2-3 above.
(5) Routes to external destinations are calculated, through
    examination of AS-external-LSAs.  The locations of the AS
    boundary routers (which originate the AS-external-LSAs) have
    been determined in steps 2-4.
Steps 2-5 are explained in further detail below.
Changes made to routing table entries as a result of these
calculations can cause the OSPF protocol to take further actions.
For example, a change to an intra-area route will cause an area
border router to originate new summary-LSAs (see Section 12.4).  See
Section 16.7 for a complete list of the OSPF protocol actions
resulting from routing table changes.
16.1.  Calculating the shortest-path tree for an area
    This calculation yields the set of intra-area routes associated
    with an area (called hereafter Area A).  A router calculates the
    shortest-path tree using itself as the root.[22] The formation
    of the shortest path tree is done here in two stages.  In the
    first stage, only links between routers and transit networks are
    considered.  Using the Dijkstra algorithm, a tree is formed from
    this subset of the link state database.  In the second stage,
    leaves are added to the tree by considering the links to stub
    networks.
    The procedure will be explained using the graph terminology that
    was introduced in Section 2.  The area's link state database is
    represented as a directed graph.  The graph's vertices are
    routers, transit networks and stub networks.  The first stage of
    the procedure concerns only the transit vertices (routers and
    transit networks) and their connecting links.  Throughout the
    shortest path calculation, the following data is also associated
    with each transit vertex:
    Vertex (node) ID
        A 32-bit number which together with the vertex type (router
        or network) uniquely identifies the vertex.  For router
        vertices the Vertex ID is the router's OSPF Router ID.  For
        network vertices, it is the IP address of the network's
        Designated Router.
    An LSA
        Each transit vertex has an associated LSA.  For router
        vertices, this is a router-LSA.  For transit networks, this
        is a network-LSA (which is actually originated by the
        network's Designated Router).  In any case, the LSA's Link
        State ID is always equal to the above Vertex ID.
    List of next hops
        The list of next hops for the current set of shortest paths
        from the root to this vertex.  There can be multiple
        shortest paths due to the equal-cost multipath capability.
        Each next hop indicates the outgoing router interface to use
        when forwarding traffic to the destination.  On broadcast,
        Point-to-MultiPoint and NBMA networks, the next hop also
        includes the IP address of the next router (if any) in the
        path towards the destination.
    Distance from root
        The link state cost of the current set of shortest paths
        from the root to the vertex.  The link state cost of a path
        is calculated as the sum of the costs of the path's
        constituent links (as advertised in router-LSAs and
        network-LSAs).  One path is said to be "shorter" than
        another if it has a smaller link state cost.
    The first stage of the procedure (i.e., the Dijkstra algorithm)
    can now be summarized as follows. At each iteration of the
    algorithm, there is a list of candidate vertices.  Paths from
    the root to these vertices have been found, but not necessarily
    the shortest ones.  However, the paths to the candidate vertex
    that is closest to the root are guaranteed to be shortest; this
    vertex is added to the shortest-path tree, removed from the
    candidate list, and its adjacent vertices are examined for
    possible addition to/modification of the candidate list.  The
    algorithm then iterates again.  It terminates when the candidate
    list becomes empty.
    The following steps describe the algorithm in detail.  Remember
    that we are computing the shortest path tree for Area A.  All
    references to link state database lookup below are from Area A's
    database.
    (1) Initialize the algorithm's data structures.  Clear the list
        of candidate vertices.  Initialize the shortest-path tree to
        only the root (which is the router doing the calculation).
        Set Area A's TransitCapability to FALSE.
    (2) Call the vertex just added to the tree vertex V.  Examine
        the LSA associated with vertex V.  This is a lookup in the
        Area A's link state database based on the Vertex ID.  If
        this is a router-LSA, and bit V of the router-LSA (see
        Section A.4.2) is set, set Area A's TransitCapability to
        TRUE.  In any case, each link described by the LSA gives the
        cost to an adjacent vertex.  For each described link, (say
        it joins vertex V to vertex W):
        (a) If this is a link to a stub network, examine the next
            link in V's LSA.  Links to stub networks will be
            considered in the second stage of the shortest path
            calculation.
        (b) Otherwise, W is a transit vertex (router or transit
            network).  Look up the vertex W's LSA (router-LSA or
            network-LSA) in Area A's link state database.  If the
            LSA does not exist, or its LS age is equal to MaxAge, or
            it does not have a link back to vertex V, examine the
            next link in V's LSA.[23]
        (c) If vertex W is already on the shortest-path tree,
            examine the next link in the LSA.
        (d) Calculate the link state cost D of the resulting path
            from the root to vertex W.  D is equal to the sum of the
            link state cost of the (already calculated) shortest
            path to vertex V and the advertised cost of the link
            between vertices V and W.  If D is:
            o   Greater than the value that already appears for
                vertex W on the candidate list, then examine the
                next link.
            o   Equal to the value that appears for vertex W on the
                candidate list, calculate the set of next hops that
                result from using the advertised link.  Input to
                this calculation is the destination (W), and its
                parent (V).  This calculation is shown in Section
                16.1.1.  This set of hops should be added to the
                next hop values that appear for W on the candidate
                list.
            o   Less than the value that appears for vertex W on the
                candidate list, or if W does not yet appear on the
                candidate list, then set the entry for W on the
                candidate list to indicate a distance of D from the
                root.  Also calculate the list of next hops that
                result from using the advertised link, setting the
                next hop values for W accordingly.  The next hop
                calculation is described in Section 16.1.1; it takes
                as input the destination (W) and its parent (V).
    (3) If at this step the candidate list is empty, the shortest-
        path tree (of transit vertices) has been completely built
        and this stage of the procedure terminates.  Otherwise,
        choose the vertex belonging to the candidate list that is
        closest to the root, and add it to the shortest-path tree
        (removing it from the candidate list in the process). Note
        that when there is a choice of vertices closest to the root,
        network vertices must be chosen before router vertices in
        order to necessarily find all equal-cost paths. This is
        consistent with the tie-breakers that were introduced in the
        modified Dijkstra algorithm used by OSPF's Multicast routing
        extensions (MOSPF).
    (4) Possibly modify the routing table.  For those routing table
        entries modified, the associated area will be set to Area A,
        the path type will be set to intra-area, and the cost will
        be set to the newly discovered shortest path's calculated
        distance.
        If the newly added vertex is an area border router or AS
        boundary router, a routing table entry is added whose
        destination type is "router".  The Options field found in
        the associated router-LSA is copied into the routing table
        entry's Optional capabilities field. Call the newly added
        vertex Router X.  If Router X is the endpoint of one of the
        calculating router's virtual links, and the virtual link
        uses Area A as Transit area:  the virtual link is declared
        up, the IP address of the virtual interface is set to the IP
        address of the outgoing interface calculated above for
        Router X, and the virtual neighbor's IP address is set to
        Router X's interface address (contained in Router X's
        router-LSA) that points back to the root of the shortest-
        path tree; equivalently, this is the interface that points
        back to Router X's parent vertex on the shortest-path tree
        (similar to the calculation in Section 16.1.1).
        If the newly added vertex is a transit network, the routing
        table entry for the network is located.  The entry's
        Destination ID is the IP network number, which can be
        obtained by masking the Vertex ID (Link State ID) with its
        associated subnet mask (found in the body of the associated
        network-LSA).  If the routing table entry already exists
        (i.e., there is already an intra-area route to the
        destination installed in the routing table), multiple
        vertices have mapped to the same IP network.  For example,
        this can occur when a new Designated Router is being
        established.  In this case, the current routing table entry
        should be overwritten if and only if the newly found path is
        just as short and the current routing table entry's Link
        State Origin has a smaller Link State ID than the newly
        added vertex' LSA.
        If there is no routing table entry for the network (the
        usual case), a routing table entry for the IP network should
        be added.  The routing table entry's Link State Origin
        should be set to the newly added vertex' LSA.
    (5) Iterate the algorithm by returning to Step 2.
    The stub networks are added to the tree in the procedure's
    second stage.  In this stage, all router vertices are again
    examined.  Those that have been determined to be unreachable in
    the above first phase are discarded.  For each reachable router
    vertex (call it V), the associated router-LSA is found in the
    link state database.  Each stub network link appearing in the
    LSA is then examined, and the following steps are executed:
    (1) Calculate the distance D of stub network from the root.  D
        is equal to the distance from the root to the router vertex
        (calculated in stage 1), plus the stub network link's
        advertised cost.  Compare this distance to the current best
        cost to the stub network.  This is done by looking up the
        stub network's current routing table entry.  If the
        calculated distance D is larger, go on to examine the next
        stub network link in the LSA.
    (2) If this step is reached, the stub network's routing table
        entry must be updated.  Calculate the set of next hops that
        would result from using the stub network link.  This
        calculation is shown in Section 16.1.1; input to this
        calculation is the destination (the stub network) and the
        parent vertex (the router vertex).  If the distance D is the
        same as the current routing table cost, simply add this set
        of next hops to the routing table entry's list of next hops.
        In this case, the routing table already has a Link State
        Origin.  If this Link State Origin is a router-LSA whose
        Link State ID is smaller than V's Router ID, reset the Link
        State Origin to V's router-LSA.
        Otherwise D is smaller than the routing table cost.
        Overwrite the current routing table entry by setting the
        routing table entry's cost to D, and by setting the entry's
        list of next hops to the newly calculated set.  Set the
        routing table entry's Link State Origin to V's router-LSA.
        Then go on to examine the next stub network link.
    For all routing table entries added/modified in the second
    stage, the associated area will be set to Area A and the path
    type will be set to intra-area.  When the list of reachable
    router-LSAs is exhausted, the second stage is completed.  At
    this time, all intra-area routes associated with Area A have
    been determined.
    The specification does not require that the above two stage
    method be used to calculate the shortest path tree.  However, if
    another algorithm is used, an identical tree must be produced.
    For this reason, it is important to note that links between
    transit vertices must be bidirectional in order to be included
    in the above tree.  It should also be mentioned that more
    efficient algorithms exist for calculating the tree; for
    example, the incremental SPF algorithm described in [Ref1].
    16.1.1.  The next hop calculation
        This section explains how to calculate the current set of
        next hops to use for a destination.  Each next hop consists
        of the outgoing interface to use in forwarding packets to
        the destination together with the IP address of the next hop
        router (if any).  The next hop calculation is invoked each
        time a shorter path to the destination is discovered.  This
        can happen in either stage of the shortest-path tree
        calculation (see Section 16.1).  In stage 1 of the
        shortest-path tree calculation a shorter path is found as
        the destination is added to the candidate list, or when the
        destination's entry on the candidate list is modified (Step
        2d of Stage 1).  In stage 2 a shorter path is discovered
        each time the destination's routing table entry is modified
        (Step 2 of Stage 2).
        The set of next hops to use for the destination may be
        recalculated several times during the shortest-path tree
        calculation, as shorter and shorter paths are discovered.
        In the end, the destination's routing table entry will
        always reflect the next hops resulting from the absolute
        shortest path(s).
        Input to the next hop calculation is a) the destination and
        b) its parent in the current shortest path between the root
        (the calculating router) and the destination.  The parent is
        always a transit vertex (i.e., always a router or a transit
        network).
        If there is at least one intervening router in the current
        shortest path between the destination and the root, the
        destination simply inherits the set of next hops from the
        parent.  Otherwise, there are two cases.  In the first case,
        the parent vertex is the root (the calculating router
        itself).  This means that the destination is either a
        directly connected network or directly connected router.
        The outgoing interface in this case is simply the OSPF
        interface connecting to the destination network/router. If
        the destination is a router which connects to the
        calculating router via a Point-to-MultiPoint network, the
        destination's next hop IP address(es) can be determined by
        examining the destination's router-LSA: each link pointing
        back to the calculating router and having a Link Data field
        belonging to the Point-to-MultiPoint network provides an IP
        address of the next hop router. If the destination is a
        directly connected network, or a router which connects to
        the calculating router via a point-to-point interface, no
        next hop IP address is required. If the destination is a
        router connected to the calculating router via a virtual
        link, the setting of the next hop should be deferred until
        the calculation in Section 16.3.
        In the second case, the parent vertex is a network that
        directly connects the calculating router to the destination
        router.  The list of next hops is then determined by
        examining the destination's router-LSA.  For each link in
        the router-LSA that points back to the parent network, the
        link's Link Data field provides the IP address of a next hop
        router.  The outgoing interface to use can then be derived
        from the next hop IP address (or it can be inherited from
        the parent network).
16.2.  Calculating the inter-area routes
    The inter-area routes are calculated by examining summary-LSAs.
    If the router has active attachments to multiple areas, only
    backbone summary-LSAs are examined.  Routers attached to a
    single area examine that area's summary-LSAs.  In either case,
    the summary-LSAs examined below are all part of a single area's
    link state database (call it Area A).
    Summary-LSAs are originated by the area border routers.  Each
    summary-LSA in Area A is considered in turn.  Remember that the
    destination described by a summary-LSA is either a network (Type
    3 summary-LSAs) or an AS boundary router (Type 4 summary-LSAs).
    For each summary-LSA:
    (1) If the cost specified by the LSA is LSInfinity, or if the
        LSA's LS age is equal to MaxAge, then examine the the next
        LSA.
    (2) If the LSA was originated by the calculating router itself,
        examine the next LSA.
    (3) If it is a Type 3 summary-LSA, and the collection of
        destinations described by the summary-LSA equals one of the
        router's configured area address ranges (see Section 3.5),
        and the particular area address range is active, then the
        summary-LSA should be ignored.  "Active" means that there
        are one or more reachable (by intra-area paths) networks
        contained in the area range.
    (4) Else, call the destination described by the LSA N (for Type
        3 summary-LSAs, N's address is obtained by masking the LSA's
        Link State ID with the network/subnet mask contained in the
        body of the LSA), and the area border originating the LSA
        BR.  Look up the routing table entry for BR having Area A as
        its associated area.  If no such entry exists for router BR
        (i.e., BR is unreachable in Area A), do nothing with this
        LSA and consider the next in the list.  Else, this LSA
        describes an inter-area path to destination N, whose cost is
        the distance to BR plus the cost specified in the LSA. Call
        the cost of this inter-area path IAC.
    (5) Next, look up the routing table entry for the destination N.
        (If N is an AS boundary router, look up the "router" routing
        table entry associated with Area A).  If no entry exists for
        N or if the entry's path type is "type 1 external" or "type
        2 external", then install the inter-area path to N, with
        associated area Area A, cost IAC, next hop equal to the list
        of next hops to router BR, and Advertising router equal to
        BR.
    (6) Else, if the paths present in the table are intra-area
        paths, do nothing with the LSA (intra-area paths are always
        preferred).
    (7) Else, the paths present in the routing table are also
        inter-area paths.  Install the new path through BR if it is
        cheaper, overriding the paths in the routing table.
        Otherwise, if the new path is the same cost, add it to the
        list of paths that appear in the routing table entry.
16.3.  Examining transit areas' summary-LSAs
    This step is only performed by area border routers attached to
    one or more non-backbone areas that are capable of carrying
    transit traffic (i.e., "transit areas", or those areas whose
    TransitCapability parameter has been set to TRUE in Step 2 of
    the Dijkstra algorithm (see Section 16.1).
    The purpose of the calculation below is to examine the transit
    areas to see whether they provide any better (shorter) paths
    than the paths previously calculated in Sections 16.1 and 16.2.
    Any paths found that are better than or equal to previously
    discovered paths are installed in the routing table.
    The calculation also determines the actual next hop(s) for those
    destinations whose next hop was calculated as a virtual link in
    Sections 16.1 and 16.2.  After completion of the calculation
    below, any paths calculated in Sections 16.1 and 16.2 that still
    have unresolved virtual next hops should be discarded.
    The calculation proceeds as follows. All the transit areas'
    summary-LSAs are examined in turn.  Each such summary-LSA
    describes a route through a transit area Area A to a Network N
    (N's address is obtained by masking the LSA's Link State ID with
    the network/subnet mask contained in the body of the LSA) or in
    the case of a Type 4 summary-LSA, to an AS boundary router N.
    Suppose also that the summary-LSA was originated by an area
    border router BR.
    (1) If the cost advertised by the summary-LSA is LSInfinity, or
        if the LSA's LS age is equal to MaxAge, then examine the
        next LSA.
    (2) If the summary-LSA was originated by the calculating router
        itself, examine the next LSA.
    (3) Look up the routing table entry for N. (If N is an AS
        boundary router, look up the "router" routing table entry
        associated with the backbone area). If it does not exist, or
        if the route type is other than intra-area or inter-area, or
        if the area associated with the routing table entry is not
        the backbone area, then examine the next LSA. In other
        words, this calculation only updates backbone intra-area
        routes found in Section 16.1 and inter-area routes found in
        Section 16.2.
    (4) Look up the routing table entry for the advertising router
        BR associated with the Area A. If it is unreachable, examine
        the next LSA. Otherwise, the cost to destination N is the
        sum of the cost in BR's Area A routing table entry and the
        cost advertised in the LSA. Call this cost IAC.
    (5) If this cost is less than the cost occurring in N's routing
        table entry, overwrite N's list of next hops with those used
        for BR, and set N's routing table cost to IAC. Else, if IAC
        is the same as N's current cost, add BR's list of next hops
        to N's list of next hops. In any case, the area associated
        with N's routing table entry must remain the backbone area,
        and the path type (either intra-area or inter-area) must
        also remain the same.
    It is important to note that the above calculation never makes
    unreachable destinations reachable, but instead just potentially
    finds better paths to already reachable destinations.  The
    calculation installs any better cost found into the routing
    table entry, from which it may be readvertised in summary-LSAs
    to other areas.
    As an example of the calculation, consider the Autonomous System
    pictured in Figure 17.  There is a single non-backbone area
    (Area 1) that physically divides the backbone into two separate
    pieces. To maintain connectivity of the backbone, a virtual link
    has been configured between routers RT1 and RT4. On the right
    side of the figure, Network N1 belongs to the backbone. The
    dotted lines indicate that there is a much shorter intra-area
                  . Area 1 (transit)     .            +
                  .                      .            |
                  .      +---+1        1+---+100      |
                  .      |RT2|----------|RT4|=========|
                  .    1/+---+********* +---+         |
                  .    /*******          .            |
                  .  1/*Virtual          .            |
               1+---+/*  Link            .         Net|work
         =======|RT1|*                   .            | N1
                +---+\                   .            |
                  .   \                  .            |
                  .    \                 .            |
                  .    1\+---+1        1+---+20       |
                  .      |RT3|----------|RT5|=========|
                  .      +---+          +---+         |
                  .                      .            |
                Figure 17: Routing through transit areas
    backbone path between router RT5 and Network N1 (cost 20) than
    there is between Router RT4 and Network N1 (cost 100). Both
    Router RT4 and Router RT5 will inject summary-LSAs for Network
    N1 into Area 1.
    After the shortest-path tree has been calculated for the
    backbone in Section 16.1, Router RT1 (left end of the virtual
    link) will have calculated a path through Router RT4 for all
    data traffic destined for Network N1. However, since Router RT5
    is so much closer to Network N1, all routers internal to Area 1
    (e.g., Routers RT2 and RT3) will forward their Network N1
    traffic towards Router RT5, instead of RT4. And indeed, after
    examining Area 1's summary-LSAs by the above calculation, Router
    RT1 will also forward Network N1 traffic towards RT5. Note that
    in this example the virtual link enables transit data traffic to
    be forwarded through Area 1, but the actual path the transit
    data traffic takes does not follow the virtual link.  In other
    words, virtual links allow transit traffic to be forwarded
    through an area, but do not dictate the precise path that the
    traffic will take.
16.4.  Calculating AS external routes
    AS external routes are calculated by examining AS-external-LSAs.
    Each of the AS-external-LSAs is considered in turn.  Most AS-
    external-LSAs describe routes to specific IP destinations.  An
    AS-external-LSA can also describe a default route for the
    Autonomous System (Destination ID = DefaultDestination,
    network/subnet mask = 0x00000000).  For each AS-external-LSA:
    (1) If the cost specified by the LSA is LSInfinity, or if the
        LSA's LS age is equal to MaxAge, then examine the next LSA.
    (2) If the LSA was originated by the calculating router itself,
        examine the next LSA.
    (3) Call the destination described by the LSA N.  N's address is
        obtained by masking the LSA's Link State ID with the
        network/subnet mask contained in the body of the LSA.  Look
        up the routing table entries (potentially one per attached
        area) for the AS boundary router (ASBR) that originated the
        LSA. If no entries exist for router ASBR (i.e., ASBR is
        unreachable), do nothing with this LSA and consider the next
        in the list.
        Else, this LSA describes an AS external path to destination
        N.  Examine the forwarding address specified in the AS-
        external-LSA.  This indicates the IP address to which
        packets for the destination should be forwarded.
        If the forwarding address is set to 0.0.0.0, packets should
        be sent to the ASBR itself. Among the multiple routing table
        entries for the ASBR, select the preferred entry as follows.
        If RFC1583Compatibility is set to "disabled", prune the set
        of routing table entries for the ASBR as described in
        Section 16.4.1. In any case, among the remaining routing
        table entries, select the routing table entry with the least
        cost; when there are multiple least cost routing table
        entries the entry whose associated area has the largest OSPF
        Area ID (when considered as an unsigned 32-bit integer) is
        chosen.
        If the forwarding address is non-zero, look up the
        forwarding address in the routing table.[24] The matching
        routing table entry must specify an intra-area or inter-area
        path; if no such path exists, do nothing with the LSA and
        consider the next in the list.
    (4) Let X be the cost specified by the preferred routing table
        entry for the ASBR/forwarding address, and Y the cost
        specified in the LSA.  X is in terms of the link state
        metric, and Y is a type 1 or 2 external metric.
    (5) Look up the routing table entry for the destination N.  If
        no entry exists for N, install the AS external path to N,
        with next hop equal to the list of next hops to the
        forwarding address, and advertising router equal to ASBR.
        If the external metric type is 1, then the path-type is set
        to type 1 external and the cost is equal to X+Y.  If the
        external metric type is 2, the path-type is set to type 2
        external, the link state component of the route's cost is X,
        and the type 2 cost is Y.
    (6) Compare the AS external path described by the LSA with the
        existing paths in N's routing table entry, as follows. If
        the new path is preferred, it replaces the present paths in
        N's routing table entry.  If the new path is of equal
        preference, it is added to N's routing table entry's list of
        paths.
        (a) Intra-area and inter-area paths are always preferred
            over AS external paths.
        (b) Type 1 external paths are always preferred over type 2
            external paths. When all paths are type 2 external
            paths, the paths with the smallest advertised type 2
            metric are always preferred.
        (c) If the new AS external path is still indistinguishable
            from the current paths in the N's routing table entry,
            and RFC1583Compatibility is set to "disabled", select
            the preferred paths based on the intra-AS paths to the
            ASBR/forwarding addresses, as specified in Section
            16.4.1.
        (d) If the new AS external path is still indistinguishable
            from the current paths in the N's routing table entry,
            select the preferred path based on a least cost
            comparison.  Type 1 external paths are compared by
            looking at the sum of the distance to the forwarding
            address and the advertised type 1 metric (X+Y).  Type 2
            external paths advertising equal type 2 metrics are
            compared by looking at the distance to the forwarding
            addresses.
    16.4.1.  External path preferences
        When multiple intra-AS paths are available to
        ASBRs/forwarding addresses, the following rules indicate
        which paths are preferred. These rules apply when the same
        ASBR is reachable through multiple areas, or when trying to
        decide which of several AS-external-LSAs should be
        preferred. In the former case the paths all terminate at the
        same ASBR, while in the latter the paths terminate at
        separate ASBRs/forwarding addresses. In either case, each
        path is represented by a separate routing table entry as
        defined in Section 11.
        This section only applies when RFC1583Compatibility is set
        to "disabled".
        The path preference rules, stated from highest to lowest
        preference, are as follows. Note that as a result of these
        rules, there may still be multiple paths of the highest
        preference. In this case, the path to use must be determined
        based on cost, as described in Section 16.4.
        o   Intra-area paths using non-backbone areas are always the
            most preferred.
        o   The other paths, intra-area backbone paths and inter-
            area paths, are of equal preference.
16.5.  Incremental updates -- summary-LSAs
    When a new summary-LSA is received, it is not necessary to
    recalculate the entire routing table.  Call the destination
    described by the summary-LSA N (N's address is obtained by
    masking the LSA's Link State ID with the network/subnet mask
    contained in the body of the LSA), and let Area A be the area to
    which the LSA belongs. There are then two separate cases:
    Case 1: Area A is the backbone and/or the router is not an area
        border router.
        In this case, the following calculations must be performed.
        First, if there is presently an inter-area route to the
        destination N, N's routing table entry is invalidated,
        saving the entry's values for later comparisons. Then the
        calculation in Section 16.2 is run again for the single
        destination N. In this calculation, all of Area A's
        summary-LSAs that describe a route to N are examined.  In
        addition, if the router is an area border router attached to
        one or more transit areas, the calculation in Section 16.3
        must be run again for the single destination.  If the
        results of these calculations have changed the cost/path to
        an AS boundary router (as would be the case for a Type 4
        summary-LSA) or to any forwarding addresses, all AS-
        external-LSAs will have to be reexamined by rerunning the
        calculation in Section 16.4.  Otherwise, if N is now newly
        unreachable, the calculation in Section 16.4 must be rerun
        for the single destination N, in case an alternate external
        route to N exists.
    Case 2: Area A is a transit area and the router is an area
        border router.
        In this case, the following calculations must be performed.
        First, if N's routing table entry presently contains one or
        more inter-area paths that utilize the transit area Area A,
        these paths should be removed. If this removes all paths
        from the routing table entry, the entry should be
        invalidated.  The entry's old values should be saved for
        later comparisons. Next the calculation in Section 16.3 must
        be run again for the single destination N. If the results of
        this calculation have caused the cost to N to increase, the
        complete routing table calculation must be rerun starting
        with the Dijkstra algorithm specified in Section 16.1.
        Otherwise, if the cost/path to an AS boundary router (as
        would be the case for a Type 4 summary-LSA) or to any
        forwarding addresses has changed, all AS-external-LSAs will
        have to be reexamined by rerunning the calculation in
        Section 16.4.  Otherwise, if N is now newly unreachable, the
        calculation in Section 16.4 must be rerun for the single
        destination N, in case an alternate external route to N
        exists.
16.6.  Incremental updates -- AS-external-LSAs
    When a new AS-external-LSA is received, it is not necessary to
    recalculate the entire routing table.  Call the destination
    described by the AS-external-LSA N.  N's address is obtained by
    masking the LSA's Link State ID with the network/subnet mask
    contained in the body of the LSA. If there is already an intra-
    area or inter-area route to the destination, no recalculation is
    necessary (internal routes take precedence).
    Otherwise, the procedure in Section 16.4 will have to be
    performed, but only for those AS-external-LSAs whose destination
    is N.  Before this procedure is performed, the present routing
    table entry for N should be invalidated.
16.7.  Events generated as a result of routing table changes
    Changes to routing table entries sometimes cause the OSPF area
    border routers to take additional actions.  These routers need
    to act on the following routing table changes:
    o   The cost or path type of a routing table entry has changed.
        If the destination described by this entry is a Network or
        AS boundary router, and this is not simply a change of AS
        external routes, new summary-LSAs may have to be generated
        (potentially one for each attached area, including the
        backbone).  See Section 12.4.3 for more information.  If a
        previously advertised entry has been deleted, or is no
        longer advertisable to a particular area, the LSA must be
        flushed from the routing domain by setting its LS age to
        MaxAge and reflooding (see Section 14.1).
    o   A routing table entry associated with a configured virtual
        link has changed.  The destination of such a routing table
        entry is an area border router.  The change indicates a
        modification to the virtual link's cost or viability.
        If the entry indicates that the area border router is newly
        reachable, the corresponding virtual link is now
        operational.  An InterfaceUp event should be generated for
        the virtual link, which will cause a virtual adjacency to
        begin to form (see Section 10.3).  At this time the virtual
        link's IP interface address and the virtual neighbor's
        Neighbor IP address are also calculated.
        If the entry indicates that the area border router is no
        longer reachable, the virtual link and its associated
        adjacency should be destroyed.  This means an InterfaceDown
        event should be generated for the associated virtual link.
        If the cost of the entry has changed, and there is a fully
        established virtual adjacency, a new router-LSA for the
        backbone must be originated.  This in turn may cause further
        routing table changes.
16.8.  Equal-cost multipath
    The OSPF protocol maintains multiple equal-cost routes to all
    destinations.  This can be seen in the steps used above to
    calculate the routing table, and in the definition of the
    routing table structure.
    Each one of the multiple routes will be of the same type
    (intra-area, inter-area, type 1 external or type 2 external),
    cost, and will have the same associated area.  However, each
    route may specify a separate next hop and Advertising router.
    There is no requirement that a router running OSPF keep track of
    all possible equal-cost routes to a destination.  An
    implementation may choose to keep only a fixed number of routes
    to any given destination.  This does not affect any of the
    algorithms presented in this specification.

Footnotes

[1]The graph's vertices represent either routers, transit networks,
or stub networks.  Since routers may belong to multiple areas, it is
not possible to color the graph's vertices.
[2]It is possible for all of a router's interfaces to be unnumbered
point-to-point links.  In this case, an IP address must be assigned
to the router.  This address will then be advertised in the router's
router-LSA as a host route.
[3]Note that in these cases both interfaces, the non-virtual and the
virtual, would have the same IP address.
[4]Note that no host route is generated for, and no IP packets can
be addressed to, interfaces to unnumbered point-to-point networks.
This is regardless of such an interface's state.
[5]It is instructive to see what happens when the Designated Router
for the network crashes.  Call the Designated Router for the network
RT1, and the Backup Designated Router RT2.  If Router RT1 crashes
(or maybe its interface to the network dies), the other routers on
the network will detect RT1's absence within RouterDeadInterval
seconds.  All routers may not detect this at precisely the same
time; the routers that detect RT1's absence before RT2 does will,
for a time, select RT2 to be both Designated Router and Backup
Designated Router.  When RT2 detects that RT1 is gone it will move
itself to Designated Router.  At this time, the remaining router
having highest Router Priority will be selected as Backup Designated
Router.
[6]On point-to-point networks, the lower level protocols indicate
whether the neighbor is up and running.  Likewise, existence of the
neighbor on virtual links is indicated by the routing table
calculation.  However, in both these cases, the Hello Protocol is
still used.  This ensures that communication between the neighbors
is bidirectional, and that each of the neighbors has a functioning
routing protocol layer.
[7]When the identity of the Designated Router is changing, it may be
quite common for a neighbor in this state to send the router a
Database Description packet; this means that there is some momentary
disagreement on the Designated Router's identity.
[8]Note that it is possible for a router to resynchronize any of its
fully established adjacencies by setting the adjacency's state back
to ExStart.  This will cause the other end of the adjacency to
process a SeqNumberMismatch event, and therefore to also go back to
ExStart state.
[9]The address space of IP networks and the address space of OSPF
Router IDs may overlap.  That is, a network may have an IP address
which is identical (when considered as a 32-bit number) to some
router's Router ID.
[10]"Discard" entries are necessary to ensure that route
summarization at area boundaries will not cause packet looping.
[11]It is assumed that, for two different address ranges matching
the destination, one range is more specific than the other. Non-
contiguous subnet masks can be configured to violate this
assumption. Such subnet mask configurations cannot be handled by the
OSPF protocol.
[12]MaxAgeDiff is an architectural constant.  It indicates the
maximum dispersion of ages, in seconds, that can occur for a single
LSA instance as it is flooded throughout the routing domain.  If two
LSAs differ by more than this, they are assumed to be different
instances of the same LSA.  This can occur when a router restarts
and loses track of the LSA's previous LS sequence number.  See
Section 13.4 for more details.
[13]When two LSAs have different LS checksums, they are assumed to
be separate instances.  This can occur when a router restarts, and
loses track of the LSA's previous LS sequence number.  In the case
where the two LSAs have the same LS sequence number, it is not
possible to determine which LSA is actually newer.  However, if the
wrong LSA is accepted as newer, the originating router will simply
originate another instance.  See Section 13.4 for further details.
[14]There is one instance where a lookup must be done based on
partial information.  This is during the routing table calculation,
when a network-LSA must be found based solely on its Link State ID.
The lookup in this case is still well defined, since no two
network-LSAs can have the same Link State ID.
[15]This is the way RFC 1583 specified point-to-point
representation.  It has three advantages: a) it does not require
allocating a subnet to the point-to-point link, b) it tends to bias
the routing so that packets destined for the point-to-point
interface will actually be received over the interface (which is
useful for diagnostic purposes) and c) it allows network
bootstrapping of a neighbor, without requiring that the bootstrap
program contain an OSPF implementation.
[16]This is the more traditional point-to-point representation used
by protocols such as RIP.
[17]This clause covers the case: Inter-area routes are not
summarized to the backbone.  This is because inter-area routes are
always associated with the backbone area.
[18]This clause is only invoked when a non-backbone Area A supports
transit data traffic (i.e., has TransitCapability set to TRUE).  For
example, in the area configuration of Figure 6, Area 2 can support
transit traffic due to the configured virtual link between Routers
RT10 and RT11. As a result, Router RT11 need only originate a single
summary-LSA into Area 2 (having the collapsed destination N9-
N11,H1), since all of Router RT11's other eligible routes have next
hops belonging to Area 2 itself (and as such only need be advertised
by other area border routers; in this case, Routers RT10 and RT7).
[19]By keeping more information in the routing table, it is possible
for an implementation to recalculate the shortest path tree for only
a single area.  In fact, there are incremental algorithms that allow
an implementation to recalculate only a portion of a single area's
shortest path tree [Ref1].  However, these algorithms are beyond the
scope of this specification.
[20]This is how the Link state request list is emptied, which
eventually causes the neighbor state to transition to Full.  See
Section 10.9 for more details.
[21]It should be a relatively rare occurrence for an LSA's LS age to
reach MaxAge in this fashion.  Usually, the LSA will be replaced by
a more recent instance before it ages out.
[22]Strictly speaking, because of equal-cost multipath, the
algorithm does not create a tree.  We continue to use the "tree"
terminology because that is what occurs most often in the existing
literature.
[23]Note that the presence of any link back to V is sufficient; it
need not be the matching half of the link under consideration from V
to W. This is enough to ensure that, before data traffic flows
between a pair of neighboring routers, their link state databases
will be synchronized.
[24]When the forwarding address is non-zero, it should point to a
router belonging to another Autonomous System.  See Section 12.4.4
for more details.

References

[Ref1]  McQuillan, J., I. Richer and E. Rosen, "ARPANET Routing
        Algorithm Improvements", BBN Technical Report 3803, April
        1978.
[Ref2]  Digital Equipment Corporation, "Information processing
        systems -- Data communications -- Intermediate System to
        Intermediate System Intra-Domain Routing Protocol", October
        1987.
[Ref3]  McQuillan, J., et.al., "The New Routing Algorithm for the
        ARPANET", IEEE Transactions on Communications, May 1980.
[Ref4]  Perlman, R., "Fault-Tolerant Broadcast of Routing
        Information", Computer Networks, December 1983.
[Ref5]  Postel, J., "Internet Protocol", STD 5, RFC 791, September
        1981.
[Ref6]  McKenzie, A., "ISO Transport Protocol specification ISO DP
        8073", RFC 905, April 1984.
[Ref7]  Deering, S., "Host extensions for IP multicasting", STD 5,
        RFC 1112, May 1988.
[Ref8]  McCloghrie, K., and M. Rose, "Management Information Base
        for network management of TCP/IP-based internets: MIB-II",
        STD 17, RFC 1213, March 1991.
[Ref9]  Moy, J., "OSPF Version 2", RFC 1583, March 1994.
[Ref10] Fuller, V., T. Li, J. Yu, and K. Varadhan, "Classless
        Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR): an Address Assignment and
        Aggregation Strategy", RFC1519, September 1993.
[Ref11] Reynolds, J., and J. Postel, "Assigned Numbers", STD 2, RFC
        1700, October 1994.
[Ref12] Almquist, P., "Type of Service in the Internet Protocol
        Suite", RFC 1349, July 1992.
[Ref13] Leiner, B., et.al., "The DARPA Internet Protocol Suite", DDN
        Protocol Handbook, April 1985.
[Ref14] Bradley, T., and C. Brown, "Inverse Address Resolution
        Protocol", RFC 1293, January 1992.
[Ref15] deSouza, O., and M. Rodrigues, "Guidelines for Running OSPF
        Over Frame Relay Networks", RFC 1586, March 1994.
[Ref16] Bellovin, S., "Security Problems in the TCP/IP Protocol
        Suite", ACM Computer Communications Review, Volume 19,
        Number 2, pp. 32-38, April 1989.
[Ref17] Rivest, R., "The MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm", RFC 1321,
        April 1992.
[Ref18] Moy, J., "Multicast Extensions to OSPF", RFC 1584, March
        1994.
[Ref19] Coltun, R., and V. Fuller, "The OSPF NSSA Option", RFC 1587,
        March 1994.
[Ref20] Ferguson, D., "The OSPF External Attributes LSA", work in
        progress.
[Ref21] Moy, J., "Extending OSPF to Support Demand Circuits", RFC
        1793, April 1995.
[Ref22] Mogul, J., and S. Deering, "Path MTU Discovery", RFC 1191,
        November 1990.
[Ref23] Rekhter, Y., and T. Li, "A Border Gateway Protocol 4 (BGP-
        4)", RFC 1771, March 1995.
[Ref24] Hinden, R., "Internet Routing Protocol Standardization
        Criteria", BBN, October 1991.
[Ref25] Moy, J., "OSPF Version 2", RFC 2178, July 1997.
[Ref26] Rosen, E., "Vulnerabilities of Network Control Protocols: An
        Example", Computer Communication Review, July 1981.

A. OSPF data formats

This appendix describes the format of OSPF protocol packets and OSPF
LSAs.  The OSPF protocol runs directly over the IP network layer.
Before any data formats are described, the details of the OSPF
encapsulation are explained.
Next the OSPF Options field is described.  This field describes
various capabilities that may or may not be supported by pieces of
the OSPF routing domain. The OSPF Options field is contained in OSPF
Hello packets, Database Description packets and in OSPF LSAs.
OSPF packet formats are detailed in Section A.3.  A description of
OSPF LSAs appears in Section A.4.

A.1 Encapsulation of OSPF packets

OSPF runs directly over the Internet Protocol's network layer.  OSPF
packets are therefore encapsulated solely by IP and local data-link
headers.
OSPF does not define a way to fragment its protocol packets, and
depends on IP fragmentation when transmitting packets larger than
the network MTU. If necessary, the length of OSPF packets can be up
to 65,535 bytes (including the IP header).  The OSPF packet types
that are likely to be large (Database Description Packets, Link
State Request, Link State Update, and Link State Acknowledgment
packets) can usually be split into several separate protocol
packets, without loss of functionality.  This is recommended; IP
fragmentation should be avoided whenever possible.  Using this
reasoning, an attempt should be made to limit the sizes of OSPF
packets sent over virtual links to 576 bytes unless Path MTU
Discovery is being performed (see [Ref22]).
The other important features of OSPF's IP encapsulation are:
o   Use of IP multicast.  Some OSPF messages are multicast, when
    sent over broadcast networks.  Two distinct IP multicast
    addresses are used.  Packets sent to these multicast addresses
    should never be forwarded; they are meant to travel a single hop
    only.  To ensure that these packets will not travel multiple
    hops, their IP TTL must be set to 1.
    AllSPFRouters
        This multicast address has been assigned the value
        224.0.0.5.  All routers running OSPF should be prepared to
        receive packets sent to this address.  Hello packets are
        always sent to this destination.  Also, certain OSPF
        protocol packets are sent to this address during the
        flooding procedure.
    AllDRouters
        This multicast address has been assigned the value
        224.0.0.6.  Both the Designated Router and Backup Designated
        Router must be prepared to receive packets destined to this
        address.  Certain OSPF protocol packets are sent to this
        address during the flooding procedure.
o   OSPF is IP protocol number 89.  This number has been registered
    with the Network Information Center.  IP protocol number
    assignments are documented in [Ref11].
o   All OSPF routing protocol packets are sent using the normal
    service TOS value of binary 0000 defined in [Ref12].
o   Routing protocol packets are sent with IP precedence set to
    Internetwork Control.  OSPF protocol packets should be given
    precedence over regular IP data traffic, in both sending and
    receiving.  Setting the IP precedence field in the IP header to
    Internetwork Control [Ref5] may help implement this objective.

A.2 The Options field

The OSPF Options field is present in OSPF Hello packets, Database
Description packets and all LSAs.  The Options field enables OSPF
routers to support (or not support) optional capabilities, and to
communicate their capability level to other OSPF routers.  Through
this mechanism routers of differing capabilities can be mixed within
an OSPF routing domain.
When used in Hello packets, the Options field allows a router to
reject a neighbor because of a capability mismatch.  Alternatively,
when capabilities are exchanged in Database Description packets a
router can choose not to forward certain LSAs to a neighbor because
of its reduced functionality.  Lastly, listing capabilities in LSAs
allows routers to forward traffic around reduced functionality
routers, by excluding them from parts of the routing table
calculation.
Five bits of the OSPF Options field have been assigned, although
only one (the E-bit) is described completely by this memo. Each bit
is described briefly below. Routers should reset (i.e.  clear)
unrecognized bits in the Options field when sending Hello packets or
Database Description packets and when originating LSAs. Conversely,
routers encountering unrecognized Option bits in received Hello
Packets, Database Description packets or LSAs should ignore the
capability and process the packet/LSA normally.
                   +------------------------------------+
                   | * | * | DC | EA | N/P | MC | E | * |
                   +------------------------------------+
                         The Options field
E-bit
    This bit describes the way AS-external-LSAs are flooded, as
    described in Sections 3.6, 9.5, 10.8 and 12.1.2 of this memo.
MC-bit
    This bit describes whether IP multicast datagrams are forwarded
    according to the specifications in [Ref18].
N/P-bit
    This bit describes the handling of Type-7 LSAs, as specified in
    [Ref19].
EA-bit
    This bit describes the router's willingness to receive and
    forward External-Attributes-LSAs, as specified in [Ref20].
DC-bit
    This bit describes the router's handling of demand circuits, as
    specified in [Ref21].

A.3 OSPF Packet Formats

There are five distinct OSPF packet types.  All OSPF packet types
begin with a standard 24 byte header.  This header is described
first.  Each packet type is then described in a succeeding section.
In these sections each packet's division into fields is displayed,
and then the field definitions are enumerated.
All OSPF packet types (other than the OSPF Hello packets) deal with
lists of LSAs.  For example, Link State Update packets implement the
flooding of LSAs throughout the OSPF routing domain.  Because of
this, OSPF protocol packets cannot be parsed unless the format of
LSAs is also understood.  The format of LSAs is described in Section
A.4.
The receive processing of OSPF packets is detailed in Section 8.2.
The sending of OSPF packets is explained in Section 8.1.

A.3.1 The OSPF packet header

Every OSPF packet starts with a standard 24 byte header.  This
header contains all the information necessary to determine whether
the packet should be accepted for further processing.  This
determination is described in Section 8.2 of the specification.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |   Version #   |     Type      |         Packet length         |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                          Router ID                            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                           Area ID                             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |           Checksum            |             AuType            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
Version #
    The OSPF version number.  This specification documents version 2
    of the protocol.
Type
    The OSPF packet types are as follows. See Sections A.3.2 through
    A.3.6 for details.
                      Type   Description
                      ________________________________
                      1      Hello
                      2      Database Description
                      3      Link State Request
                      4      Link State Update
                      5      Link State Acknowledgment
Packet length
    The length of the OSPF protocol packet in bytes.  This length
    includes the standard OSPF header.
Router ID
    The Router ID of the packet's source.
Area ID
    A 32 bit number identifying the area that this packet belongs
    to.  All OSPF packets are associated with a single area.  Most
    travel a single hop only.  Packets travelling over a virtual
    link are labelled with the backbone Area ID of 0.0.0.0.
Checksum
    The standard IP checksum of the entire contents of the packet,
    starting with the OSPF packet header but excluding the 64-bit
    authentication field.  This checksum is calculated as the 16-bit
    one's complement of the one's complement sum of all the 16-bit
    words in the packet, excepting the authentication field.  If the
    packet's length is not an integral number of 16-bit words, the
    packet is padded with a byte of zero before checksumming.  The
    checksum is considered to be part of the packet authentication
    procedure; for some authentication types the checksum
    calculation is omitted.
AuType
    Identifies the authentication procedure to be used for the
    packet.  Authentication is discussed in Appendix D of the
    specification.  Consult Appendix D for a list of the currently
    defined authentication types.
Authentication
    A 64-bit field for use by the authentication scheme. See
    Appendix D for details.

A.3.2 The Hello packet

Hello packets are OSPF packet type 1.  These packets are sent
periodically on all interfaces (including virtual links) in order to
establish and maintain neighbor relationships.  In addition, Hello
Packets are multicast on those physical networks having a multicast
or broadcast capability, enabling dynamic discovery of neighboring
routers.
All routers connected to a common network must agree on certain
parameters (Network mask, HelloInterval and RouterDeadInterval).
These parameters are included in Hello packets, so that differences
can inhibit the forming of neighbor relationships.  A detailed
explanation of the receive processing for Hello packets is presented
in Section 10.5.  The sending of Hello packets is covered in Section
9.5.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |   Version #   |       1       |         Packet length         |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                          Router ID                            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                           Area ID                             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |           Checksum            |             AuType            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                        Network Mask                           |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |         HelloInterval         |    Options    |    Rtr Pri    |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     RouterDeadInterval                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                      Designated Router                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                   Backup Designated Router                    |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                          Neighbor                             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                              ...                              |
Network mask
    The network mask associated with this interface.  For example,
    if the interface is to a class B network whose third byte is
    used for subnetting, the network mask is 0xffffff00.
Options
    The optional capabilities supported by the router, as documented
    in Section A.2.
HelloInterval
    The number of seconds between this router's Hello packets.
Rtr Pri
    This router's Router Priority.  Used in (Backup) Designated
    Router election.  If set to 0, the router will be ineligible to
    become (Backup) Designated Router.
RouterDeadInterval
    The number of seconds before declaring a silent router down.
Designated Router
    The identity of the Designated Router for this network, in the
    view of the sending router.  The Designated Router is identified
    here by its IP interface address on the network.  Set to 0.0.0.0
    if there is no Designated Router.
Backup Designated Router
    The identity of the Backup Designated Router for this network,
    in the view of the sending router.  The Backup Designated Router
    is identified here by its IP interface address on the network.
    Set to 0.0.0.0 if there is no Backup Designated Router.
Neighbor
    The Router IDs of each router from whom valid Hello packets have
    been seen recently on the network.  Recently means in the last
    RouterDeadInterval seconds.

A.3.3 The Database Description packet

Database Description packets are OSPF packet type 2.  These packets
are exchanged when an adjacency is being initialized.  They describe
the contents of the link-state database.  Multiple packets may be
used to describe the database.  For this purpose a poll-response
procedure is used.  One of the routers is designated to be the
master, the other the slave.  The master sends Database Description
packets (polls) which are acknowledged by Database Description
packets sent by the slave (responses).  The responses are linked to
the polls via the packets' DD sequence numbers.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |   Version #   |       2       |         Packet length         |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                          Router ID                            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                           Area ID                             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |           Checksum            |             AuType            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |         Interface MTU         |    Options    |0|0|0|0|0|I|M|MS
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     DD sequence number                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                                                               |
   +-                                                             -+
   |                                                               |
   +-                      An LSA Header                          -+
   |                                                               |
   +-                                                             -+
   |                                                               |
   +-                                                             -+
   |                                                               |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                              ...                              |
The format of the Database Description packet is very similar to
both the Link State Request and Link State Acknowledgment packets.
The main part of all three is a list of items, each item describing
a piece of the link-state database.  The sending of Database
Description Packets is documented in Section 10.8.  The reception of
Database Description packets is documented in Section 10.6.
Interface MTU
    The size in bytes of the largest IP datagram that can be sent
    out the associated interface, without fragmentation.  The MTUs
    of common Internet link types can be found in Table 7-1 of
    [Ref22]. Interface MTU should be set to 0 in Database
    Description packets sent over virtual links.
Options
    The optional capabilities supported by the router, as documented
    in Section A.2.
I-bit
    The Init bit.  When set to 1, this packet is the first in the
    sequence of Database Description Packets.
M-bit
    The More bit.  When set to 1, it indicates that more Database
    Description Packets are to follow.
MS-bit
    The Master/Slave bit.  When set to 1, it indicates that the
    router is the master during the Database Exchange process.
    Otherwise, the router is the slave.
DD sequence number
    Used to sequence the collection of Database Description Packets.
    The initial value (indicated by the Init bit being set) should
    be unique.  The DD sequence number then increments until the
    complete database description has been sent.
The rest of the packet consists of a (possibly partial) list of the
link-state database's pieces.  Each LSA in the database is described
by its LSA header.  The LSA header is documented in Section A.4.1.
It contains all the information required to uniquely identify both
the LSA and the LSA's current instance.

A.3.4 The Link State Request packet

Link State Request packets are OSPF packet type 3.  After exchanging
Database Description packets with a neighboring router, a router may
find that parts of its link-state database are out-of-date.  The
Link State Request packet is used to request the pieces of the
neighbor's database that are more up-to-date.  Multiple Link State
Request packets may need to be used.
A router that sends a Link State Request packet has in mind the
precise instance of the database pieces it is requesting. Each
instance is defined by its LS sequence number, LS checksum, and LS
age, although these fields are not specified in the Link State
Request Packet itself.  The router may receive even more recent
instances in response.
The sending of Link State Request packets is documented in Section
10.9.  The reception of Link State Request packets is documented in
Section 10.7.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |   Version #   |       3       |         Packet length         |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                          Router ID                            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                           Area ID                             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |           Checksum            |             AuType            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                          LS type                              |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Link State ID                           |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     Advertising Router                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                              ...                              |
Each LSA requested is specified by its LS type, Link State ID, and
Advertising Router.  This uniquely identifies the LSA, but not its
instance.  Link State Request packets are understood to be requests
for the most recent instance (whatever that might be).

A.3.5 The Link State Update packet

Link State Update packets are OSPF packet type 4.  These packets
implement the flooding of LSAs.  Each Link State Update packet
carries a collection of LSAs one hop further from their origin.
Several LSAs may be included in a single packet.
Link State Update packets are multicast on those physical networks
that support multicast/broadcast.  In order to make the flooding
procedure reliable, flooded LSAs are acknowledged in Link State
Acknowledgment packets.  If retransmission of certain LSAs is
necessary, the retransmitted LSAs are always sent directly to the
neighbor.  For more information on the reliable flooding of LSAs,
consult Section 13.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |   Version #   |       4       |         Packet length         |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                          Router ID                            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                           Area ID                             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |           Checksum            |             AuType            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                            # LSAs                             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                                                               |
   +-                                                            +-+
   |                             LSAs                              |
   +-                                                            +-+
   |                              ...                              |
# LSAs
    The number of LSAs included in this update.
The body of the Link State Update packet consists of a list of LSAs.
Each LSA begins with a common 20 byte header, described in Section
A.4.1. Detailed formats of the different types of LSAs are described
in Section A.4.

A.3.6 The Link State Acknowledgment packet

Link State Acknowledgment Packets are OSPF packet type 5.  To make
the flooding of LSAs reliable, flooded LSAs are explicitly
acknowledged.  This acknowledgment is accomplished through the
sending and receiving of Link State Acknowledgment packets.
Multiple LSAs can be acknowledged in a single Link State
Acknowledgment packet.
Depending on the state of the sending interface and the sender of
the corresponding Link State Update packet, a Link State
Acknowledgment packet is sent either to the multicast address
AllSPFRouters, to the multicast address AllDRouters, or as a
unicast.  The sending of Link State Acknowledgement packets is
documented in Section 13.5.  The reception of Link State
Acknowledgement packets is documented in Section 13.7.
The format of this packet is similar to that of the Data Description
packet.  The body of both packets is simply a list of LSA headers.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |   Version #   |       5       |         Packet length         |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                          Router ID                            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                           Area ID                             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |           Checksum            |             AuType            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                       Authentication                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                                                               |
   +-                                                             -+
   |                                                               |
   +-                         An LSA Header                       -+
   |                                                               |
   +-                                                             -+
   |                                                               |
   +-                                                             -+
   |                                                               |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                              ...                              |
Each acknowledged LSA is described by its LSA header.  The LSA
header is documented in Section A.4.1.  It contains all the
information required to uniquely identify both the LSA and the LSA's
current instance.

A.4 LSA formats

This memo defines five distinct types of LSAs.  Each LSA begins with
a standard 20 byte LSA header.  This header is explained in Section
A.4.1.  Succeeding sections then diagram the separate LSA types.
Each LSA describes a piece of the OSPF routing domain.  Every router
originates a router-LSA.  In addition, whenever the router is
elected Designated Router, it originates a network-LSA.  Other types
of LSAs may also be originated (see Section 12.4).  All LSAs are
then flooded throughout the OSPF routing domain.  The flooding
algorithm is reliable, ensuring that all routers have the same
collection of LSAs.  (See Section 13 for more information concerning
the flooding algorithm).  This collection of LSAs is called the
link-state database.
From the link state database, each router constructs a shortest path
tree with itself as root.  This yields a routing table (see Section
11).  For the details of the routing table build process, see
Section 16.

A.4.1 The LSA header

All LSAs begin with a common 20 byte header.  This header contains
enough information to uniquely identify the LSA (LS type, Link State
ID, and Advertising Router).  Multiple instances of the LSA may
exist in the routing domain at the same time.  It is then necessary
to determine which instance is more recent.  This is accomplished by
examining the LS age, LS sequence number and LS checksum fields that
are also contained in the LSA header.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |            LS age             |    Options    |    LS type    |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                        Link State ID                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     Advertising Router                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     LS sequence number                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |         LS checksum           |             length            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
LS age
    The time in seconds since the LSA was originated.
Options
    The optional capabilities supported by the described portion of
    the routing domain.  OSPF's optional capabilities are documented
    in Section A.2.
LS type
    The type of the LSA.  Each LSA type has a separate advertisement
    format.  The LSA types defined in this memo are as follows (see
    Section 12.1.3 for further explanation):
                    LS Type   Description
                    ___________________________________
                    1         Router-LSAs
                    2         Network-LSAs
                    3         Summary-LSAs (IP network)
                    4         Summary-LSAs (ASBR)
                    5         AS-external-LSAs
Link State ID
    This field identifies the portion of the internet environment
    that is being described by the LSA.  The contents of this field
    depend on the LSA's LS type.  For example, in network-LSAs the
    Link State ID is set to the IP interface address of the
    network's Designated Router (from which the network's IP address
    can be derived).  The Link State ID is further discussed in
    Section 12.1.4.
Advertising Router
    The Router ID of the router that originated the LSA.  For
    example, in network-LSAs this field is equal to the Router ID of
    the network's Designated Router.
LS sequence number
    Detects old or duplicate LSAs.  Successive instances of an LSA
    are given successive LS sequence numbers.  See Section 12.1.6
    for more details.
LS checksum
    The Fletcher checksum of the complete contents of the LSA,
    including the LSA header but excluding the LS age field. See
    Section 12.1.7 for more details.
length
    The length in bytes of the LSA.  This includes the 20 byte LSA
    header.

A.4.2 Router-LSAs

Router-LSAs are the Type 1 LSAs.  Each router in an area originates
a router-LSA.  The LSA describes the state and cost of the router's
links (i.e., interfaces) to the area.  All of the router's links to
the area must be described in a single router-LSA.  For details
concerning the construction of router-LSAs, see Section 12.4.1.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |            LS age             |     Options   |       1       |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                        Link State ID                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     Advertising Router                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     LS sequence number                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |         LS checksum           |             length            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |    0    |V|E|B|        0      |            # links            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                          Link ID                              |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                         Link Data                             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |     Type      |     # TOS     |            metric             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                              ...                              |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |      TOS      |        0      |          TOS  metric          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                          Link ID                              |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                         Link Data                             |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                              ...                              |
In router-LSAs, the Link State ID field is set to the router's OSPF
Router ID. Router-LSAs are flooded throughout a single area only.
bit V
    When set, the router is an endpoint of one or more fully
    adjacent virtual links having the described area as Transit area
    (V is for virtual link endpoint).
bit E
    When set, the router is an AS boundary router (E is for
    external).
bit B
    When set, the router is an area border router (B is for border).
# links
    The number of router links described in this LSA.  This must be
    the total collection of router links (i.e., interfaces) to the
    area.
The following fields are used to describe each router link (i.e.,
interface). Each router link is typed (see the below Type field).
The Type field indicates the kind of link being described.  It may
be a link to a transit network, to another router or to a stub
network.  The values of all the other fields describing a router
link depend on the link's Type.  For example, each link has an
associated 32-bit Link Data field.  For links to stub networks this
field specifies the network's IP address mask.  For other link types
the Link Data field specifies the router interface's IP address.
Type
    A quick description of the router link.  One of the following.
    Note that host routes are classified as links to stub networks
    with network mask of 0xffffffff.
             Type   Description
             __________________________________________________
             1      Point-to-point connection to another router
             2      Connection to a transit network
             3      Connection to a stub network
             4      Virtual link
Link ID
    Identifies the object that this router link connects to.  Value
    depends on the link's Type.  When connecting to an object that
    also originates an LSA (i.e., another router or a transit
    network) the Link ID is equal to the neighboring LSA's Link
    State ID.  This provides the key for looking up the neighboring
    LSA in the link state database during the routing table
    calculation. See Section 12.2 for more details.
                   Type   Link ID
                   ______________________________________
                   1      Neighboring router's Router ID
                   2      IP address of Designated Router
                   3      IP network/subnet number
                   4      Neighboring router's Router ID
Link Data
    Value again depends on the link's Type field. For connections to
    stub networks, Link Data specifies the network's IP address
    mask. For unnumbered point-to-point connections, it specifies
    the interface's MIB-II [Ref8] ifIndex value. For the other link
    types it specifies the router interface's IP address. This
    latter piece of information is needed during the routing table
    build process, when calculating the IP address of the next hop.
    See Section 16.1.1 for more details.
# TOS
    The number of different TOS metrics given for this link, not
    counting the required link metric (referred to as the TOS 0
    metric in [Ref9]).  For example, if no additional TOS metrics
    are given, this field is set to 0.
metric
    The cost of using this router link.
Additional TOS-specific information may also be included, for
backward compatibility with previous versions of the OSPF
specification ([Ref9]). Within each link, and for each desired TOS,
TOS TOS-specific link information may be encoded as follows:
TOS IP Type of Service that this metric refers to.  The encoding of
    TOS in OSPF LSAs is described in Section 12.3.
TOS metric
    TOS-specific metric information.

A.4.3 Network-LSAs

Network-LSAs are the Type 2 LSAs.  A network-LSA is originated for
each broadcast and NBMA network in the area which supports two or
more routers.  The network-LSA is originated by the network's
Designated Router.  The LSA describes all routers attached to the
network, including the Designated Router itself.  The LSA's Link
State ID field lists the IP interface address of the Designated
Router.
The distance from the network to all attached routers is zero.  This
is why metric fields need not be specified in the network-LSA.  For
details concerning the construction of network-LSAs, see Section
12.4.2.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |            LS age             |      Options  |      2        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                        Link State ID                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     Advertising Router                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     LS sequence number                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |         LS checksum           |             length            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                         Network Mask                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                        Attached Router                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                              ...                              |
Network Mask
    The IP address mask for the network.  For example, a class A
    network would have the mask 0xff000000.
Attached Router
    The Router IDs of each of the routers attached to the network.
    Actually, only those routers that are fully adjacent to the
    Designated Router are listed.  The Designated Router includes
    itself in this list.  The number of routers included can be
    deduced from the LSA header's length field.

A.4.4 Summary-LSAs

Summary-LSAs are the Type 3 and 4 LSAs.  These LSAs are originated
by area border routers. Summary-LSAs describe inter-area
destinations.  For details concerning the construction of summary-
LSAs, see Section 12.4.3.
Type 3 summary-LSAs are used when the destination is an IP network.
In this case the LSA's Link State ID field is an IP network number
(if necessary, the Link State ID can also have one or more of the
network's "host" bits set; see Appendix E for details). When the
destination is an AS boundary router, a Type 4 summary-LSA is used,
and the Link State ID field is the AS boundary router's OSPF Router
ID.  (To see why it is necessary to advertise the location of each
ASBR, consult Section 16.4.)  Other than the difference in the Link
State ID field, the format of Type 3 and 4 summary-LSAs is
identical.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |            LS age             |     Options   |    3 or 4     |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                        Link State ID                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     Advertising Router                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     LS sequence number                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |         LS checksum           |             length            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                         Network Mask                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |      0        |                  metric                       |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |     TOS       |                TOS  metric                    |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                              ...                              |
For stub areas, Type 3 summary-LSAs can also be used to describe a
(per-area) default route.  Default summary routes are used in stub
areas instead of flooding a complete set of external routes.  When
describing a default summary route, the summary-LSA's Link State ID
is always set to DefaultDestination (0.0.0.0) and the Network Mask
is set to 0.0.0.0.
Network Mask
    For Type 3 summary-LSAs, this indicates the destination
    network's IP address mask.  For example, when advertising the
    location of a class A network the value 0xff000000 would be
    used.  This field is not meaningful and must be zero for Type 4
    summary-LSAs.
metric
    The cost of this route.  Expressed in the same units as the
    interface costs in the router-LSAs.
Additional TOS-specific information may also be included, for
backward compatibility with previous versions of the OSPF
specification ([Ref9]). For each desired TOS, TOS-specific
information is encoded as follows:
TOS IP Type of Service that this metric refers to.  The encoding of
    TOS in OSPF LSAs is described in Section 12.3.
TOS metric
    TOS-specific metric information.

A.4.5 AS-external-LSAs

AS-external-LSAs are the Type 5 LSAs.  These LSAs are originated by
AS boundary routers, and describe destinations external to the AS.
For details concerning the construction of AS-external-LSAs, see
Section 12.4.3.
AS-external-LSAs usually describe a particular external destination.
For these LSAs the Link State ID field specifies an IP network
number (if necessary, the Link State ID can also have one or more of
the network's "host" bits set; see Appendix E for details).  AS-
external-LSAs are also used to describe a default route.  Default
routes are used when no specific route exists to the destination.
When describing a default route, the Link State ID is always set to
DefaultDestination (0.0.0.0) and the Network Mask is set to 0.0.0.0.
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |            LS age             |     Options   |      5        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                        Link State ID                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     Advertising Router                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                     LS sequence number                        |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |         LS checksum           |             length            |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                         Network Mask                          |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |E|     0       |                  metric                       |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                      Forwarding address                       |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                      External Route Tag                       |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |E|    TOS      |                TOS  metric                    |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                      Forwarding address                       |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                      External Route Tag                       |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                              ...                              |
Network Mask
    The IP address mask for the advertised destination.  For
    example, when advertising a class A network the mask 0xff000000
    would be used.
bit E
    The type of external metric.  If bit E is set, the metric
    specified is a Type 2 external metric.  This means the metric is
    considered larger than any link state path.  If bit E is zero,
    the specified metric is a Type 1 external metric.  This means
    that it is expressed in the same units as the link state metric
    (i.e., the same units as interface cost).
metric
    The cost of this route.  Interpretation depends on the external
    type indication (bit E above).
Forwarding address
    Data traffic for the advertised destination will be forwarded to
    this address.  If the Forwarding address is set to 0.0.0.0, data
    traffic will be forwarded instead to the LSA's originator (i.e.,
    the responsible AS boundary router).
External Route Tag
    A 32-bit field attached to each external route.  This is not
    used by the OSPF protocol itself.  It may be used to communicate
    information between AS boundary routers; the precise nature of
    such information is outside the scope of this specification.
Additional TOS-specific information may also be included, for
backward compatibility with previous versions of the OSPF
specification ([Ref9]). For each desired TOS, TOS-specific
information is encoded as follows:
TOS The Type of Service that the following fields concern.  The
    encoding of TOS in OSPF LSAs is described in Section 12.3.
bit E
    For backward-compatibility with [Ref9].
TOS metric
    TOS-specific metric information.
Forwarding address
    For backward-compatibility with [Ref9].
External Route Tag
    For backward-compatibility with [Ref9].

B. Architectural Constants

Several OSPF protocol parameters have fixed architectural values.
These parameters have been referred to in the text by names such as
LSRefreshTime.  The same naming convention is used for the
configurable protocol parameters.  They are defined in Appendix C.
The name of each architectural constant follows, together with its
value and a short description of its function.
LSRefreshTime
    The maximum time between distinct originations of any particular
    LSA.  If the LS age field of one of the router's self-originated
    LSAs reaches the value LSRefreshTime, a new instance of the LSA
    is originated, even though the contents of the LSA (apart from
    the LSA header) will be the same.  The value of LSRefreshTime is
    set to 30 minutes.
MinLSInterval
    The minimum time between distinct originations of any particular
    LSA.  The value of MinLSInterval is set to 5 seconds.
MinLSArrival
    For any particular LSA, the minimum time that must elapse
    between reception of new LSA instances during flooding. LSA
    instances received at higher frequencies are discarded. The
    value of MinLSArrival is set to 1 second.
MaxAge
    The maximum age that an LSA can attain. When an LSA's LS age
    field reaches MaxAge, it is reflooded in an attempt to flush the
    LSA from the routing domain (See Section 14). LSAs of age MaxAge
    are not used in the routing table calculation.  The value of
    MaxAge is set to 1 hour.
CheckAge
    When the age of an LSA in the link state database hits a
    multiple of CheckAge, the LSA's checksum is verified.  An
    incorrect checksum at this time indicates a serious error.  The
    value of CheckAge is set to 5 minutes.
MaxAgeDiff
    The maximum time dispersion that can occur, as an LSA is flooded
    throughout the AS.  Most of this time is accounted for by the
    LSAs sitting on router output queues (and therefore not aging)
    during the flooding process.  The value of MaxAgeDiff is set to
    15 minutes.
LSInfinity
    The metric value indicating that the destination described by an
    LSA is unreachable. Used in summary-LSAs and AS-external-LSAs as
    an alternative to premature aging (see Section 14.1). It is
    defined to be the 24-bit binary value of all ones: 0xffffff.
DefaultDestination
    The Destination ID that indicates the default route.  This route
    is used when no other matching routing table entry can be found.
    The default destination can only be advertised in AS-external-
    LSAs and in stub areas' type 3 summary-LSAs.  Its value is the
    IP address 0.0.0.0. Its associated Network Mask is also always
    0.0.0.0.
InitialSequenceNumber
    The value used for LS Sequence Number when originating the first
    instance of any LSA. Its value is the signed 32-bit integer
    0x80000001.
MaxSequenceNumber
    The maximum value that LS Sequence Number can attain.  Its value
    is the signed 32-bit integer 0x7fffffff.

C. Configurable Constants

The OSPF protocol has quite a few configurable parameters.  These
parameters are listed below.  They are grouped into general
functional categories (area parameters, interface parameters, etc.).
Sample values are given for some of the parameters.
Some parameter settings need to be consistent among groups of
routers.  For example, all routers in an area must agree on that
area's parameters, and all routers attached to a network must agree
on that network's IP network number and mask.
Some parameters may be determined by router algorithms outside of
this specification (e.g., the address of a host connected to the
router via a SLIP line).  From OSPF's point of view, these items are
still configurable.
C.1 Global parameters
    In general, a separate copy of the OSPF protocol is run for each
    area.  Because of this, most configuration parameters are
    defined on a per-area basis.  The few global configuration
    parameters are listed below.
    Router ID
        This is a 32-bit number that uniquely identifies the router
        in the Autonomous System.  One algorithm for Router ID
        assignment is to choose the largest or smallest IP address
        assigned to the router.  If a router's OSPF Router ID is
        changed, the router's OSPF software should be restarted
        before the new Router ID takes effect. Before restarting in
        order to change its Router ID, the router should flush its
        self-originated LSAs from the routing domain (see Section
        14.1), or they will persist for up to MaxAge minutes.
    RFC1583Compatibility
        Controls the preference rules used in Section 16.4 when
        choosing among multiple AS-external-LSAs advertising the
        same destination. When set to "enabled", the preference
        rules remain those specified by RFC 1583 ([Ref9]). When set
        to "disabled", the preference rules are those stated in
        Section 16.4.1, which prevent routing loops when AS-
        external-LSAs for the same destination have been originated
        from different areas. Set to "enabled" by default.
        In order to minimize the chance of routing loops, all OSPF
        routers in an OSPF routing domain should have
        RFC1583Compatibility set identically. When there are routers
        present that have not been updated with the functionality
        specified in Section 16.4.1 of this memo, all routers should
        have RFC1583Compatibility set to "enabled". Otherwise, all
        routers should have RFC1583Compatibility set to "disabled",
        preventing all routing loops.
C.2 Area parameters
    All routers belonging to an area must agree on that area's
    configuration.  Disagreements between two routers will lead to
    an inability for adjacencies to form between them, with a
    resulting hindrance to the flow of routing protocol and data
    traffic.  The following items must be configured for an area:
    Area ID
        This is a 32-bit number that identifies the area.  The Area
        ID of 0.0.0.0 is reserved for the backbone.  If the area
        represents a subnetted network, the IP network number of the
        subnetted network may be used for the Area ID.
    List of address ranges
        An OSPF area is defined as a list of address ranges. Each
        address range consists of the following items:
        [IP address, mask]
                Describes the collection of IP addresses contained
                in the address range. Networks and hosts are
                assigned to an area depending on whether their
                addresses fall into one of the area's defining
                address ranges.  Routers are viewed as belonging to
                multiple areas, depending on their attached
                networks' area membership.
        Status  Set to either Advertise or DoNotAdvertise.  Routing
                information is condensed at area boundaries.
                External to the area, at most a single route is
                advertised (via a summary-LSA) for each address
                range. The route is advertised if and only if the
                address range's Status is set to Advertise.
                Unadvertised ranges allow the existence of certain
                networks to be intentionally hidden from other
                areas. Status is set to Advertise by default.
        As an example, suppose an IP subnetted network is to be its
        own OSPF area.  The area would be configured as a single
        address range, whose IP address is the address of the
        subnetted network, and whose mask is the natural class A, B,
        or C address mask.  A single route would be advertised
        external to the area, describing the entire subnetted
        network.
    ExternalRoutingCapability
        Whether AS-external-LSAs will be flooded into/throughout the
        area.  If AS-external-LSAs are excluded from the area, the
        area is called a "stub".  Internal to stub areas, routing to
        external destinations will be based solely on a default
        summary route.  The backbone cannot be configured as a stub
        area.  Also, virtual links cannot be configured through stub
        areas.  For more information, see Section 3.6.
    StubDefaultCost
        If the area has been configured as a stub area, and the
        router itself is an area border router, then the
        StubDefaultCost indicates the cost of the default summary-
        LSA that the router should advertise into the area.
C.3 Router interface parameters
    Some of the configurable router interface parameters (such as IP
    interface address and subnet mask) actually imply properties of
    the attached networks, and therefore must be consistent across
    all the routers attached to that network.  The parameters that
    must be configured for a router interface are:
    IP interface address
        The IP protocol address for this interface.  This uniquely
        identifies the router over the entire internet.  An IP
        address is not required on point-to-point networks.  Such a
        point-to-point network is called "unnumbered".
    IP interface mask
        Also referred to as the subnet/network mask, this indicates
        the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the
        attached network.  Masking the IP interface address with the
        IP interface mask yields the IP network number of the
        attached network.  On point-to-point networks and virtual
        links, the IP interface mask is not defined. On these
        networks, the link itself is not assigned an IP network
        number, and so the addresses of each side of the link are
        assigned independently, if they are assigned at all.
    Area ID
        The OSPF area to which the attached network belongs.
    Interface output cost
        The cost of sending a packet on the interface, expressed in
        the link state metric.  This is advertised as the link cost
        for this interface in the router's router-LSA. The interface
        output cost must always be greater than 0.
    RxmtInterval
        The number of seconds between LSA retransmissions, for
        adjacencies belonging to this interface.  Also used when
        retransmitting Database Description and Link State Request
        Packets.  This should be well over the expected round-trip
        delay between any two routers on the attached network.  The
        setting of this value should be conservative or needless
        retransmissions will result.  Sample value for a local area
        network: 5 seconds.
    InfTransDelay
        The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link
        State Update Packet over this interface.  LSAs contained in
        the update packet must have their age incremented by this
        amount before transmission.  This value should take into
        account the transmission and propagation delays of the
        interface.  It must be greater than 0.  Sample value for a
        local area network: 1 second.
    Router Priority
        An 8-bit unsigned integer.  When two routers attached to a
        network both attempt to become Designated Router, the one
        with the highest Router Priority takes precedence.  If there
        is still a tie, the router with the highest Router ID takes
        precedence.  A router whose Router Priority is set to 0 is
        ineligible to become Designated Router on the attached
        network.  Router Priority is only configured for interfaces
        to broadcast and NBMA networks.
    HelloInterval
        The length of time, in seconds, between the Hello Packets
        that the router sends on the interface.  This value is
        advertised in the router's Hello Packets.  It must be the
        same for all routers attached to a common network.  The
        smaller the HelloInterval, the faster topological changes
        will be detected; however, more OSPF routing protocol
        traffic will ensue.  Sample value for a X.25 PDN network: 30
        seconds.  Sample value for a local area network: 10 seconds.
    RouterDeadInterval
        After ceasing to hear a router's Hello Packets, the number
        of seconds before its neighbors declare the router down.
        This is also advertised in the router's Hello Packets in
        their RouterDeadInterval field.  This should be some
        multiple of the HelloInterval (say 4).  This value again
        must be the same for all routers attached to a common
        network.
    AuType
        Identifies the authentication procedure to be used on the
        attached network.  This value must be the same for all
        routers attached to the network.  See Appendix D for a
        discussion of the defined authentication types.
    Authentication key
        This configured data allows the authentication procedure to
        verify OSPF protocol packets received over the interface.
        For example, if the AuType indicates simple password, the
        Authentication key would be a clear 64-bit password.
        Authentication keys associated with the other OSPF
        authentication types are discussed in Appendix D.
C.4 Virtual link parameters
    Virtual links are used to restore/increase connectivity of the
    backbone.  Virtual links may be configured between any pair of
    area border routers having interfaces to a common (non-backbone)
    area.  The virtual link appears as an unnumbered point-to-point
    link in the graph for the backbone.  The virtual link must be
    configured in both of the area border routers.
    A virtual link appears in router-LSAs (for the backbone) as if
    it were a separate router interface to the backbone.  As such,
    it has all of the parameters associated with a router interface
    (see Section C.3).  Although a virtual link acts like an
    unnumbered point-to-point link, it does have an associated IP
    interface address.  This address is used as the IP source in
    OSPF protocol packets it sends along the virtual link, and is
    set dynamically during the routing table build process.
    Interface output cost is also set dynamically on virtual links
    to be the cost of the intra-area path between the two routers.
    The parameter RxmtInterval must be configured, and should be
    well over the expected round-trip delay between the two routers.
    This may be hard to estimate for a virtual link; it is better to
    err on the side of making it too large.  Router Priority is not
    used on virtual links.
    A virtual link is defined by the following two configurable
    parameters: the Router ID of the virtual link's other endpoint,
    and the (non-backbone) area through which the virtual link runs
    (referred to as the virtual link's Transit area).  Virtual links
    cannot be configured through stub areas.
C.5 NBMA network parameters
    OSPF treats an NBMA network much like it treats a broadcast
    network.  Since there may be many routers attached to the
    network, a Designated Router is selected for the network.  This
    Designated Router then originates a network-LSA, which lists all
    routers attached to the NBMA network.
    However, due to the lack of broadcast capabilities, it may be
    necessary to use configuration parameters in the Designated
    Router selection.  These parameters will only need to be
    configured in those routers that are themselves eligible to
    become Designated Router (i.e., those router's whose Router
    Priority for the network is non-zero), and then only if no
    automatic procedure for discovering neighbors exists:
    List of all other attached routers
        The list of all other routers attached to the NBMA network.
        Each router is listed by its IP interface address on the
        network.  Also, for each router listed, that router's
        eligibility to become Designated Router must be defined.
        When an interface to a NBMA network comes up, the router
        sends Hello Packets only to those neighbors eligible to
        become Designated Router, until the identity of the
        Designated Router is discovered.
    PollInterval
        If a neighboring router has become inactive (Hello Packets
        have not been seen for RouterDeadInterval seconds), it may
        still be necessary to send Hello Packets to the dead
        neighbor.  These Hello Packets will be sent at the reduced
        rate PollInterval, which should be much larger than
        HelloInterval.  Sample value for a PDN X.25 network: 2
        minutes.
C.6 Point-to-MultiPoint network parameters
    On Point-to-MultiPoint networks, it may be necessary to
    configure the set of neighbors that are directly reachable over
    the Point-to-MultiPoint network. Each neighbor is identified by
    its IP address on the Point-to-MultiPoint network. Designated
    Routers are not elected on Point-to-MultiPoint networks, so the
    Designated Router eligibility of configured neighbors is
    undefined.
    Alternatively, neighbors on Point-to-MultiPoint networks may be
    dynamically discovered by lower-level protocols such as Inverse
    ARP ([Ref14]).
C.7 Host route parameters
    Host routes are advertised in router-LSAs as stub networks with
    mask 0xffffffff.  They indicate either router interfaces to
    point-to-point networks, looped router interfaces, or IP hosts
    that are directly connected to the router (e.g., via a SLIP
    line).  For each host directly connected to the router, the
    following items must be configured:
    Host IP address
        The IP address of the host.
    Cost of link to host
        The cost of sending a packet to the host, in terms of the
        link state metric.  However, since the host probably has
        only a single connection to the internet, the actual
        configured cost in many cases is unimportant (i.e., will
        have no effect on routing).
    Area ID
        The OSPF area to which the host belongs.

D. Authentication

All OSPF protocol exchanges are authenticated.  The OSPF packet
header (see Section A.3.1) includes an authentication type field,
and 64-bits of data for use by the appropriate authentication scheme
(determined by the type field).
The authentication type is configurable on a per-interface (or
equivalently, on a per-network/subnet) basis.  Additional
authentication data is also configurable on a per-interface basis.
Authentication types 0, 1 and 2 are defined by this specification.
All other authentication types are reserved for definition by the
IANA ([email protected]).  The current list of authentication types is
described below in Table 20.
              AuType       Description
              ___________________________________________
              0            Null authentication
              1            Simple password
              2            Cryptographic authentication
              All others   Reserved for assignment by the
                           IANA ([email protected])
                  Table 20: OSPF authentication types.
D.1 Null authentication
    Use of this authentication type means that routing exchanges
    over the network/subnet are not authenticated.  The 64-bit
    authentication field in the OSPF header can contain anything; it
    is not examined on packet reception. When employing Null
    authentication, the entire contents of each OSPF packet (other
    than the 64-bit authentication field) are checksummed in order
    to detect data corruption.
D.2 Simple password authentication
    Using this authentication type, a 64-bit field is configured on
    a per-network basis.  All packets sent on a particular network
    must have this configured value in their OSPF header 64-bit
    authentication field.  This essentially serves as a "clear" 64-
    bit password. In addition, the entire contents of each OSPF
    packet (other than the 64-bit authentication field) are
    checksummed in order to detect data corruption.
    Simple password authentication guards against routers
    inadvertently joining the routing domain; each router must first
    be configured with its attached networks' passwords before it
    can participate in routing.  However, simple password
    authentication is vulnerable to passive attacks currently
    widespread in the Internet (see [Ref16]). Anyone with physical
    access to the network can learn the password and compromise the
    security of the OSPF routing domain.
D.3 Cryptographic authentication
    Using this authentication type, a shared secret key is
    configured in all routers attached to a common network/subnet.
    For each OSPF protocol packet, the key is used to
    generate/verify a "message digest" that is appended to the end
    of the OSPF packet. The message digest is a one-way function of
    the OSPF protocol packet and the secret key. Since the secret
    key is never sent over the network in the clear, protection is
    provided against passive attacks.
    The algorithms used to generate and verify the message digest
    are specified implicitly by the secret key. This specification
    completely defines the use of OSPF Cryptographic authentication
    when the MD5 algorithm is used.
    In addition, a non-decreasing sequence number is included in
    each OSPF protocol packet to protect against replay attacks.
    This provides long term protection; however, it is still
    possible to replay an OSPF packet until the sequence number
    changes. To implement this feature, each neighbor data structure
    contains a new field called the "cryptographic sequence number".
    This field is initialized to zero, and is also set to zero
    0                   1                   2                   3
    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |              0                |    Key ID     | Auth Data Len |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
   |                 Cryptographic sequence number                 |
   +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
               Figure 18: Usage of the Authentication field
               in the OSPF packet header when Cryptographic
                      Authentication is employed
    whenever the neighbor's state transitions to "Down". Whenever an
    OSPF packet is accepted as authentic, the cryptographic sequence
    number is set to the received packet's sequence number.
    This specification does not provide a rollover procedure for the
    cryptographic sequence number. When the cryptographic sequence
    number that the router is sending hits the maximum value, the
    router should reset the cryptographic sequence number that it is
    sending back to 0. After this is done, the router's neighbors
    will reject the router's OSPF packets for a period of
    RouterDeadInterval, and then the router will be forced to
    reestablish all adjacencies over the interface. However, it is
    expected that many implementations will use "seconds since
    reboot" (or "seconds since 1960", etc.) as the cryptographic
    sequence number. Such a choice will essentially prevent
    rollover, since the cryptographic sequence number field is 32
    bits in length.
    The OSPF Cryptographic authentication option does not provide
    confidentiality.
    When cryptographic authentication is used, the 64-bit
    Authentication field in the standard OSPF packet header is
    redefined as shown in Figure 18. The new field definitions are
    as follows:
    Key ID
        This field identifies the algorithm and secret key used to
        create the message digest appended to the OSPF packet. Key
        Identifiers are unique per-interface (or equivalently, per-
        subnet).
    Auth Data Len
        The length in bytes of the message digest appended to the
        OSPF packet.
    Cryptographic sequence number
        An unsigned 32-bit non-decreasing sequence number. Used to
        guard against replay attacks.
    The message digest appended to the OSPF packet is not actually
    considered part of the OSPF protocol packet: the message digest
    is not included in the OSPF header's packet length, although it
    is included in the packet's IP header length field.
    Each key is identified by the combination of interface and Key
    ID. An interface may have multiple keys active at any one time.
    This enables smooth transition from one key to another. Each key
    has four time constants associated with it. These time constants
    can be expressed in terms of a time-of-day clock, or in terms of
    a router's local clock (e.g., number of seconds since last
    reboot):
    KeyStartAccept
        The time that the router will start accepting packets that
        have been created with the given key.
    KeyStartGenerate
        The time that the router will start using the key for packet
        generation.
    KeyStopGenerate
        The time that the router will stop using the key for packet
        generation.
    KeyStopAccept
        The time that the router will stop accepting packets that
        have been created with the given key.
    In order to achieve smooth key transition, KeyStartAccept should
    be less than KeyStartGenerate and KeyStopGenerate should be less
    than KeyStopAccept. If KeyStopGenerate and KeyStopAccept are
    left unspecified, the key's lifetime is infinite. When a new key
    replaces an old, the KeyStartGenerate time for the new key must
    be less than or equal to the KeyStopGenerate time of the old
    key.
    Key storage should persist across a system restart, warm or
    cold, to avoid operational issues. In the event that the last
    key associated with an interface expires, it is unacceptable to
    revert to an unauthenticated condition, and not advisable to
    disrupt routing.  Therefore, the router should send a "last
    authentication key expiration" notification to the network
    manager and treat the key as having an infinite lifetime until
    the lifetime is extended, the key is deleted by network
    management, or a new key is configured.
D.4 Message generation
    After building the contents of an OSPF packet, the
    authentication procedure indicated by the sending interface's
    Autype value is called before the packet is sent. The
    authentication procedure modifies the OSPF packet as follows.
    D.4.1 Generating Null authentication
        When using Null authentication, the packet is modified as
        follows:
        (1) The Autype field in the standard OSPF header is set to
            0.
        (2) The checksum field in the standard OSPF header is set to
            the standard IP checksum of the entire contents of the
            packet, starting with the OSPF packet header but
            excluding the 64-bit authentication field.  This
            checksum is calculated as the 16-bit one's complement of
            the one's complement sum of all the 16-bit words in the
            packet, excepting the authentication field.  If the
            packet's length is not an integral number of 16-bit
            words, the packet is padded with a byte of zero before
            checksumming.
    D.4.2 Generating Simple password authentication
        When using Simple password authentication, the packet is
        modified as follows:
        (1) The Autype field in the standard OSPF header is set to
            1.
        (2) The checksum field in the standard OSPF header is set to
            the standard IP checksum of the entire contents of the
            packet, starting with the OSPF packet header but
            excluding the 64-bit authentication field.  This
            checksum is calculated as the 16-bit one's complement of
            the one's complement sum of all the 16-bit words in the
            packet, excepting the authentication field.  If the
            packet's length is not an integral number of 16-bit
            words, the packet is padded with a byte of zero before
            checksumming.
        (3) The 64-bit authentication field in the OSPF packet
            header is set to the 64-bit password (i.e.,
            authentication key) that has been configured for the
            interface.
    D.4.3 Generating Cryptographic authentication
        When using Cryptographic authentication, there may be
        multiple keys configured for the interface. In this case,
        among the keys that are valid for message generation (i.e,
        that have KeyStartGenerate <= current time <
        KeyStopGenerate) choose the one with the most recent
        KeyStartGenerate time. Using this key, modify the packet as
        follows:
        (1) The Autype field in the standard OSPF header is set to
            2.
        (2) The checksum field in the standard OSPF header is not
            calculated, but is instead set to 0.
        (3) The Key ID (see Figure 18) is set to the chosen key's
            Key ID.
        (4) The Auth Data Len field is set to the length in bytes of
            the message digest that will be appended to the OSPF
            packet. When using MD5 as the authentication algorithm,
            Auth Data Len will be 16.
        (5) The 32-bit Cryptographic sequence number (see Figure 18)
            is set to a non-decreasing value (i.e., a value at least
            as large as the last value sent out the interface). The
            precise values to use in the cryptographic sequence
            number field are implementation-specific. For example,
            it may be based on a simple counter, or be based on the
            system's clock.
        (6) The message digest is then calculated and appended to
            the OSPF packet.  The authentication algorithm to be
            used in calculating the digest is indicated by the key
            itself.  Input to the authentication algorithm consists
            of the OSPF packet and the secret key. When using MD5 as
            the authentication algorithm, the message digest
            calculation proceeds as follows:
            (a) The 16 byte MD5 key is appended to the OSPF packet.
            (b) Trailing pad and length fields are added, as
                specified in [Ref17].
            (c) The MD5 authentication algorithm is run over the
                concatenation of the OSPF packet, secret key, pad
                and length fields, producing a 16 byte message
                digest (see [Ref17]).
            (d) The MD5 digest is written over the OSPF key (i.e.,
                appended to the original OSPF packet). The digest is
                not counted in the OSPF packet's length field, but
                is included in the packet's IP length field. Any
                trailing pad or length fields beyond the digest are
                not counted or transmitted.
D.5 Message verification
    When an OSPF packet has been received on an interface, it must
    be authenticated. The authentication procedure is indicated by
    the setting of Autype in the standard OSPF packet header, which
    matches the setting of Autype for the receiving OSPF interface.
    If an OSPF protocol packet is accepted as authentic, processing
    of the packet continues as specified in Section 8.2. Packets
    which fail authentication are discarded.
    D.5.1 Verifying Null authentication
        When using Null authentication, the checksum field in the
        OSPF header must be verified. It must be set to the 16-bit
        one's complement of the one's complement sum of all the 16-
        bit words in the packet, excepting the authentication field.
        (If the packet's length is not an integral number of 16-bit
        words, the packet is padded with a byte of zero before
        checksumming.)
    D.5.2 Verifying Simple password authentication
        When using Simple password authentication, the received OSPF
        packet is authenticated as follows:
        (1) The checksum field in the OSPF header must be verified.
            It must be set to the 16-bit one's complement of the
            one's complement sum of all the 16-bit words in the
            packet, excepting the authentication field.  (If the
            packet's length is not an integral number of 16-bit
            words, the packet is padded with a byte of zero before
            checksumming.)
        (2) The 64-bit authentication field in the OSPF packet
            header must be equal to the 64-bit password (i.e.,
            authentication key) that has been configured for the
            interface.
    D.5.3 Verifying Cryptographic authentication
        When using Cryptographic authentication, the received OSPF
        packet is authenticated as follows:
        (1) Locate the receiving interface's configured key having
            Key ID equal to that specified in the received OSPF
            packet (see Figure 18). If the key is not found, or if
            the key is not valid for reception (i.e., current time <
            KeyStartAccept or current time >= KeyStopAccept), the
            OSPF packet is discarded.
        (2) If the cryptographic sequence number found in the OSPF
            header (see Figure 18) is less than the cryptographic
            sequence number recorded in the sending neighbor's data
            structure, the OSPF packet is discarded.
        (3) Verify the appended message digest in the following
            steps:
            (a) The received digest is set aside.
            (b) A new digest is calculated, as specified in Step 6
                of Section D.4.3.
            (c) The calculated and received digests are compared. If
                they do not match, the OSPF packet is discarded. If
                they do match, the OSPF protocol packet is accepted
                as authentic, and the "cryptographic sequence
                number" in the neighbor's data structure is set to
                the sequence number found in the packet's OSPF
                header.

E. An algorithm for assigning Link State IDs

The Link State ID in AS-external-LSAs and summary-LSAs is usually
set to the described network's IP address. However, if necessary one
or more of the network's host bits may be set in the Link State ID.
This allows the router to originate separate LSAs for networks
having the same address, yet different masks. Such networks can
occur in the presence of supernetting and subnet 0s (see [Ref10]).
This appendix gives one possible algorithm for setting the host bits
in Link State IDs.  The choice of such an algorithm is a local
decision. Separate routers are free to use different algorithms,
since the only LSAs affected are the ones that the router itself
originates. The only requirement on the algorithms used is that the
network's IP address should be used as the Link State ID whenever
possible; this maximizes interoperability with OSPF implementations
predating RFC 1583.
The algorithm below is stated for AS-external-LSAs.  This is only
for clarity; the exact same algorithm can be used for summary-LSAs.
Suppose that the router wishes to originate an AS-external-LSA for a
network having address NA and mask NM1. The following steps are then
used to determine the LSA's Link State ID:
(1) Determine whether the router is already originating an AS-
    external-LSA with Link State ID equal to NA (in such an LSA the
    router itself will be listed as the LSA's Advertising Router).
    If not, the Link State ID is set equal to NA and the algorithm
    terminates. Otherwise,
(2) Obtain the network mask from the body of the already existing
    AS-external-LSA. Call this mask NM2. There are then two cases:
    o   NM1 is longer (i.e., more specific) than NM2. In this case,
        set the Link State ID in the new LSA to be the network
        [NA,NM1] with all the host bits set (i.e., equal to NA or'ed
        together with all the bits that are not set in NM1, which is
        network [NA,NM1]'s broadcast address).
    o   NM2 is longer than NM1. In this case, change the existing
        LSA (having Link State ID of NA) to reference the new
        network [NA,NM1] by incrementing the sequence number,
        changing the mask in the body to NM1 and inserting the cost
        of the new network. Then originate a new LSA for the old
        network [NA,NM2], with Link State ID equal to NA or'ed
        together with the bits that are not set in NM2 (i.e.,
        network [NA,NM2]'s broadcast address).
The above algorithm assumes that all masks are contiguous; this
ensures that when two networks have the same address, one mask is
more specific than the other. The algorithm also assumes that no
network exists having an address equal to another network's
broadcast address. Given these two assumptions, the above algorithm
always produces unique Link State IDs. The above algorithm can also
be reworded as follows:  When originating an AS-external-LSA, try to
use the network number as the Link State ID.  If that produces a
conflict, examine the two networks in conflict. One will be a subset
of the other. For the less specific network, use the network number
as the Link State ID and for the more specific use the network's
broadcast address instead (i.e., flip all the "host" bits to 1).  If
the most specific network was originated first, this will cause you
to originate two LSAs at once.
As an example of the algorithm, consider its operation when the
following sequence of events occurs in a single router (Router A).
(1) Router A wants to originate an AS-external-LSA for
    [10.0.0.0,255.255.255.0]:
    (a) A Link State ID of 10.0.0.0 is used.
(2) Router A then wants to originate an AS-external-LSA for
    [10.0.0.0,255.255.0.0]:
    (a) The LSA for [10.0.0,0,255.255.255.0] is reoriginated using a
        new Link State ID of 10.0.0.255.
    (b) A Link State ID of 10.0.0.0 is used for
        [10.0.0.0,255.255.0.0].
(3) Router A then wants to originate an AS-external-LSA for
    [10.0.0.0,255.0.0.0]:
    (a) The LSA for [10.0.0.0,255.255.0.0] is reoriginated using a
        new Link State ID of 10.0.255.255.
    (b) A Link State ID of 10.0.0.0 is used for
        [10.0.0.0,255.0.0.0].
    (c) The network [10.0.0.0,255.255.255.0] keeps its Link State ID
        of 10.0.0.255.

F. Multiple interfaces to the same network/subnet

There are at least two ways to support multiple physical interfaces
to the same IP subnet. Both methods will interoperate with
implementations of RFC 1583 (and of course this memo). The two
methods are sketched briefly below. An assumption has been made that
each interface has been assigned a separate IP address (otherwise,
support for multiple interfaces is more of a link-level or ARP issue
than an OSPF issue).
Method 1:
    Run the entire OSPF functionality over both interfaces, sending
    and receiving hellos, flooding, supporting separate interface
    and neighbor FSMs for each interface, etc. When doing this all
    other routers on the subnet will treat the two interfaces as
    separate neighbors, since neighbors are identified (on broadcast
    and NBMA networks) by their IP address.
    Method 1 has the following disadvantages:
    (1) You increase the total number of neighbors and adjacencies.
    (2) You lose the bidirectionality test on both interfaces, since
        bidirectionality is based on Router ID.
    (3) You have to consider both interfaces together during the
        Designated Router election, since if you declare both to be
        DR simultaneously you can confuse the tie-breaker (which is
        Router ID).
Method 2:
    Run OSPF over only one interface (call it the primary
    interface), but include both the primary and secondary
    interfaces in your Router-LSA.
    Method 2 has the following disadvantages:
    (1) You lose the bidirectionality test on the secondary
        interface.
    (2) When the primary interface fails, you need to promote the
        secondary interface to primary status.

G. Differences from RFC 2178

This section documents the differences between this memo and RFC
2178.  All differences are backward-compatible. Implementations of
this memo and of RFCs 2178, 1583, and 1247 will interoperate.
G.1 Flooding modifications
    Three changes have been made to the flooding procedure in
    Section 13.
    The first change is to step 4 in Section 13. Now MaxAge LSAs are
    acknowledged and then discarded only when both a) there is no
    database copy of the LSA and b) none of router's neighbors are
    in states Exchange or Loading. In all other cases, the MaxAge
    LSA is processed like any other LSA, installing the LSA in the
    database and flooding it out the appropriate interfaces when the
    LSA is more recent than the database copy (Step 5 of Section
    13). This change also affects the contents of Table 19.
    The second change is to step 5a in Section 13. The MinLSArrival
    check is meant only for LSAs received during flooding, and
    should not be performed on those LSAs that the router itself
    originates.
    The third change is to step 8 in Section 13. Confusion between
    routers as to which LSA instance is more recent can cause a
    disastrous amount of flooding in a link-state protocol (see
    [Ref26]). OSPF guards against this problem in two ways: a) the
    LS age field is used like a TTL field in flooding, to eventually
    remove looping LSAs from the network (see Section 13.3), and b)
    routers refuse to accept LSA updates more frequently than once
    every MinLSArrival seconds (see Section 13).  However, there is
    still one case in RFC 2178 where disagreements regarding which
    LSA is more recent can cause a lot of flooding traffic:
    responding to old LSAs by reflooding the database copy.  For
    this reason, Step 8 of Section 13 has been amended to only
    respond with the database copy when that copy has not been sent
    in any Link State Update within the last MinLSArrival seconds.
G.2 Changes to external path preferences
    There is still the possibility of a routing loop in RFC 2178
    when both a) virtual links are in use and b) the same external
    route is being imported by multiple ASBRs, each of which is in a
    separate area. To fix this problem, Section 16.4.1 has been
    revised. To choose the correct ASBR/forwarding address, intra-
    area paths through non-backbone areas are always preferred.
    However, intra-area paths through the backbone area (Area 0) and
    inter-area paths are now of equal preference, and must be
    compared solely based on cost.
    The reasoning behind this change is as follows. When virtual
    links are in use, an intra-area backbone path for one router can
    turn into an inter-area path in a router several hops closer to
    the destination. Hence, intra-area backbone paths and inter-area
    paths must be of equal preference. We can safely compare their
    costs, preferring the path with the smallest cost, due to the
    calculations in Section 16.3.
    Thanks to Michael Briggs and Jeremy McCooey of the UNH
    InterOperability Lab for pointing out this problem.
G.3 Incomplete resolution of virtual next hops
    One of the functions of the calculation in Section 16.3 is to
    determine the actual next hop(s) for those destinations whose
    next hop was calculated as a virtual link in Sections 16.1 and
    16.2.  After completion of the calculation in Section 16.3, any
    paths calculated in Sections 16.1 and 16.2 that still have
    unresolved virtual next hops should be discarded.
G.4 Routing table lookup
    The routing table lookup algorithm in Section 11.1 has been
    modified to reflect current practice. The "best match" routing
    table entry is now always selected to be the one providing the
    most specific (longest) match. Suppose for example a router is
    forwarding packets to the destination 192.9.1.1. A routing table
    entry for 192.9.1/24 will always be a better match than the
    routing table entry for 192.9/16, regardless of the routing
    table entries' path-types. Note however that when multiple paths
    are available for a given routing table entry, the calculations
    in Sections 16.1, 16.2, and 16.4 always yield the paths having
    the most preferential path-type. (Intra-area paths are the most
    preferred, followed in order by inter-area, type 1 external and
    type 2 external paths; see Section 11).

Security Considerations

All OSPF protocol exchanges are authenticated. OSPF supports
multiple types of authentication; the type of authentication in use
can be configured on a per network segment basis. One of OSPF's
authentication types, namely the Cryptographic authentication
option, is believed to be secure against passive attacks and provide
significant protection against active attacks. When using the
Cryptographic authentication option, each router appends a "message
digest" to its transmitted OSPF packets. Receivers then use the
shared secret key and received digest to verify that each received
OSPF packet is authentic.
The quality of the security provided by the Cryptographic
authentication option depends completely on the strength of the
message digest algorithm (MD5 is currently the only message digest
algorithm specified), the strength of the key being used, and the
correct implementation of the security mechanism in all
communicating OSPF implementations.  It also requires that all
parties maintain the secrecy of the shared secret key.
None of the OSPF authentication types provide confidentiality. Nor
do they protect against traffic analysis. Key management is also not
addressed by this memo.
For more information, see Sections 8.1, 8.2, and Appendix D.

Author's Address

John Moy
Ascend Communications, Inc.
1 Robbins Road
Westford, MA 01886
Phone: 978-952-1367
Fax:   978-392-2075
EMail: [email protected]

Full Copyright Statement

Copyright (C) The Internet Society (1998).  All Rights Reserved.
This document and translations of it may be copied and furnished to
others, and derivative works that comment on or otherwise explain it
or assist in its implementation may be prepared, copied, published
and distributed, in whole or in part, without restriction of any
kind, provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph
are included on all such copies and derivative works.  However, this
document itself may not be modified in any way, such as by removing
the copyright notice or references to the Internet Society or other
Internet organizations, except as needed for the purpose of
developing Internet standards in which case the procedures for
copyrights defined in the Internet Standards process must be
followed, or as required to translate it into languages other than
English.
The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be
revoked by the Internet Society or its successors or assigns.
This document and the information contained herein is provided on an
"AS IS" basis and THE INTERNET SOCIETY AND THE INTERNET ENGINEERING
TASK FORCE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY THAT THE USE OF THE INFORMATION
HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.